3 Se Catalogo

Switches and Mechanical Safety
3SE / 3TK28
Introduction
Contents
Pages
3SE International (IEC) Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3 General data
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/413/7
3SE5 technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/8
3SE2 / 3SE3 technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/9
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/10
Plastic, 31 mm
3SE5 / 3SE2 plastic enclosures, 31mm and 50 mm widths

3SE5, selection and ordering data, 31 mm width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/1113/13
3SE5, selection and ordering data, Operating Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/16
3SE5, actuation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/1913/21
3SE5, dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/22
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
selection and ordering data, 31 mm and 50 mm widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/17

selection and ordering data, Operating Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/18
actuation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/2313/26
dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/27
3SE2 plastic enclosures, 40 mm width

3SE2, selection and ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/28
3SE5 metal enclosures, 40 mm and 56 mm widths
3SE5, dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/4813/50
3SE2
3SE2
3SE2
3SE2
/
/
/
/
3SE3,
3SE3,
3SE3,
3SE3,
selection and ordering data, 40 mm and 56 mm widths . . . .13/3813/40

selection and ordering data, Operating Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . .13/41
actuation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/5213/61
dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/62
Plastic, 50 mm
Metal, 40 mm
Metal, 56 mm
3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/42

3SE5 / 3SE2 open-type design
3SE5, actuation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/51
3SE5, Open-type
3SE3 metal enclosures, compact design with molded cable

3SE03 North American (NEMA) Limit Switches
Plug-in and NEMA 6P Submersible
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/65
Technical specifications, modular plug-in and NEMA Type 6P submersible . . . . . .13/66
Ordering and selection data
Modular, plug-in metal housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/67
NEMA type 6P submersible, prewired cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/68
NEMA type 6P submersible, prewired receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/69
Modular, Plug-in and NEMA 6P sumbersible as components . . . . . . . . . . . .13/70
Levers for plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/7113/72
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/73
Dimension Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/7413/76
3SE3, Molded Cable
Modular Plug-in
Metal Enclosure
Ordering and selection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/7713/78
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/7713/78
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/78
Dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/7713/78
Metal Enclosure
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Industrial Controls Catalog
13/1
3SE / 3TK28
Introduction
Contents
Pages
3SE Mechanical Safety

3SE7 Cable-operated Switches
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/79
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/79
Selection and ordering data, switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/80
Selection and ordering data, accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/81
Travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/79
Dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/82
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/83
3SE7
3SE5 / 3SE2 interlock switches with separate actuator

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/84
3SE5, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/85
3SE5, selection and ordering data, plastic, 31 mm and 50 mm widths . . . . . . . . .13/87
3SE5, selection and ordering data, metal, 40 mm and 56 mm widths . . . . . . . . .13/88
3SE5, selection and ordering data, actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/89
3SE5, operation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/91
3SE5, dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/9213/93
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/86

selection and ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/90
operation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/94
dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/94
Metal, 40 mm
3SE5 / 3SE2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/89

3SE5 / 3SE2 interlock switches with solenoid locking
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/9513/96
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/97
3SE5, selection and ordering data, plastic enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/98
3SE5, selection and ordering data, metal enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/99
3SE5, selection and ordering data, actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/100
3SE5, Schematics, operation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/102
3SE5, dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/103
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
Metal, 54 mm
selection and ordering data, metal enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/101

selection and ordering data, actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/101
operation and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/104
dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/104
3SE5 / 3SE2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/100

3SE6 magnetic monitoring systems
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/105, 13/109
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/106
Selection and ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/107
Dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/108
3SE6
3SB38 two-hand control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/110

3SE5 / 3SE2 hinge switches
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/111
3SE5, selection and ordering data, plastic, 31 mm width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/112
3SE5, selection and ordering data, metal, 40 mm width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/113
3SE5, contact blocks and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/115
3SE5, dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/115
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
3SE2,
13/2
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/116

selection and ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/114
contact block and operating travel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/116
dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/116
Plastic, 31 mm

3SE / 3TK28 / 3RK3

Introduction
Contents
Pages
3TK Mechanical Safety

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/117
3TK28, with relay enabling circuits
Selection and ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/11813/121
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/12213/127
Dimension Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/128
3TK282
3TK28, with electronic enabling circuits

3TK28, with contactor relay enabling circuits
3TK2845
3TK28, with special functions

3TK285
3RK3 Modular Safety System
3RK3 Modular Safety System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/144
3TK281
3RK3

13/3
3SE International Limit Switches
3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Overview
Position switches in the innovative SIRIUS 3SE5 series are modern in design, compact, modular and simple to connect.
Design
Complete units
The 3SE5 switches are available in five different enclosure sizes:

Open-type position switch IP20 or IP10
Plastic enclosures according to EN 50047 (31 mm wide),
1 cable entry
Plastic enclosures (50 mm wide), 2 cable entries
Metal enclosures according to EN 50041 (40 mm wide),
1 cable entry
Metal enclosures (56 mm wide), 3 cable entries
Popular versions of the position switches in standard enclosures

are available as complete units.
Enclosure sizes
The following items are available in addition from the 3SE2

series:
Plastic enclosure according to EN 50041, 40 mm wide
Metal enclosures with 3 or 4 contacts, 56 mm wide
Enclosure versions
Position switches with plastic and metal enclosures
Modular system
The 3SE5 series features a new modular system comprising different sizes of the basic switch and an actuator which must be
ordered separately. Thanks to the modular construction of the
switch the user can select the right solution for his application
from numerous versions and install it himself in a very short time.
The short delivery times of the modules enable fast replacement
and thus ensure high plant availability.
Various basic switches can be selected for the 3SE5 series:

With switching elements with two or three contacts (screw terminals) designed as slow-action or snap-action contacts
Optional LED status display
With mounted four or five-pole M12 connector socket
(available for the wide enclosures as an accessory for selfassembly)
With 6-pole connector socket + PE on the metal enclosures
With increased corrosion protection
Actuator variants
The following actuator variants are available:
Rounded plungers
Roller plungers
Roller levers
Angular roller levers
Spring rods
Twist levers and rod actuators
Fork levers
The actuator rollers are available with various materials and
diameters.
Examples of selection options in the modular system
3SE2 series
The position switches of the 3SE2 series are still available, in particular those switch versions which are not yet covered by the
new 3SE5 series, including the complete 3SE2 230 series with
40 mm plastic enclosure or additional switching element versions, e. g. with make-before-break, with 2 NO contacts and with
3 or 4 contacts.
13/4
Twist actuators for twist levers and rod actuators,

with setting of switching to right, left or right/left
(standard for all twist actuators except version for fork levers)

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Optional LED indicators
Mounting
LED indicators available for all enclosure sizes
Easy plug-in method for fast replacement of the actuator head
The enclosure versions can be supplied with an LED signaling

indicator (1 green + 1 yellow). This is the first time that optical signaling equipment is also available for small standard enclosures according to EN 50047. The LED signaling indicators
are available in all common voltages (24 V DC and 230 V AC).
(1) Open cover

(2) Actuate locking lever
(3) Replace the head (turnable by 16 x 22.5)
(4) Lock and close the cover
Additional contacts
Fast connection method
Exchangeable two and three-pole switching blocks for all enclosure sizes
For plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm
The new three-pole switching block (2 NC, 1 NO) in snap-action

and slow-action is regularly available for all enclosure forms. It
offers more switching through redundant shutdowns (2 NC contacts) with simultaneous signaling (1 NO contact). The same installation space is required as for a two-pole switching block.
These position switches can be wired quickly and easily as an

added customer benefit. The connecting cable is first connected to the terminals of the contact block and then guided
through a slit into the cable gland opening. The time saved
through this new connection method is approx. 20 to 25 %.
Contact reliability
The new contact blocks ensure an extremely high contact stability. This applies even when the devices are switching low voltages and currents, e. g. 1 mA at 5 V DC.
Positive opening q
The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically,
positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to
as "positive opening".

13/5
3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Benefits
The 3SE5 position switches differ from the previous series

through the following new characteristics:
The modular structure of the product range allows a number
of versions with a smaller number of bearing types for enclosures and operating mechanisms.
All actuators around the axis in increments of 22.5.
Rounded plungers and roller plungers according to EN 50041
with 3 mm overtravel (total travel 9 mm) for greater tolerance
when switching.
All enclosure sizes now also including the small enclosure
31 mm wide are optionally available with an LED signaling
indicator.
All enclosure variants have an integrated chlorinated rubber
diaphragm (high functional safety in cold and aggressive
environments).
All switching elements are replaceable.
The new three-pole switching element 1 NO + 2 NC is available for all enclosure sizes.
The short-stroke switching element 1 NO + 1 NC improves the
precision of the switching operation through a reduced actuation path.
The 1 NO + 1 NC snap-action contact block with 2 x 2 mm
contact opening is suitable for simultaneous disconnect and
signaling particularly in the elevator industry.
The plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm has simple and
fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from
approx. 20 to 25 % of the time when connecting.
Application
With the standard position switches, mechanical positions of
moved machine parts are converted into electrical signals.
Through their modular and uniform design and large number of
variants, the devices can meet practically all requirements in
industry.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. And many different actuator variants are available to
match the mechanical configuration of the moved machined
parts. Dimensions, fixing points and characteristics are largely in
accordance with the EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
The devices are suitable for use in virtually any climate.
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1.
The protective measure of "total insulation" by the molded-plastic
enclosure is accomplished by the use of molded-plastic
screw-glands.
Safety position switches
For controls according to IEC 60204-1 or EN 60204-1 the devices can be used as a safety position switch. To secure position
switches against changes in their position, keyed techniques
must be employed on installation.
13/6
Safety circuits
The standards IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1 require positive
opening of the NC contacts. Hence for the purposes of personal
safety, the assured opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to IEC 60947-5-1 with the
symbol q.
Category 2 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) can be attained with 3SE5 position switches with q, and category 3 or 4
when using an additional position switch, if the corresponding
failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed,
e. g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching devices from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. The operating
mechanisms (actuators) must also be connected to the enclosure by keyed techniques. The corresponding operating mechanisms are marked in the catalog with q.
Contacts for each application
Snap-action contacts: NC contacts and NO contacts switch at
the same time regardless of the actuating speed
(vmin = 0.01 m/s) and contact erosion.
Slow-action contacts: Difference in travel between "NC contact opens" and "NO contact closes"; the switching speed is
the same as or proportional to the actuating speed
(vmin = 0.4 m/s).
Operating mechanisms for each application
Rounded plungers and roller plungers
Operation in direction of the plunger axis or in case of roller
plunger with bar at right angles to the plunger axis
The roller plunger is recommended for lateral actuation and
relatively long overtravel.
Roller and angular roller levers
For actuators made of finely ground steel in the form of cams,
straight-edges (approach angle 30) or cam disks
Spring rods
Can be used for undefined actuations and changing starting
conditions
Starting from any direction is possible.
Twist levers and rod actuators
For a high starting speed (v = 1.5 m/s)
Variety of starting options
Insensitive to oil, grinding dust, ice and coarse-grained
material
With the twist lever the maximum approach angle is always
equal to the maximum trailing angle
Rod actuator when no actuator with approach and trailing
angle is possible
Adjustment of the lever in increments of 10.
Can be adjusted with left or right switching
Fork levers
Switchable in two directions
Latching actuator
For reciprocating movements

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Options
On the following pages you will find selection tables for complete
units as well as components of the modular system.
Version with M12 connector socket or 6-pole + PE

Version with M12 connector socket and with 2 LEDs
For the plastic enclosures with a width of 31 and 50 mm the basic switches are designed as complete units with rounded
plunger (according to standard).
Complete units
Modular system
Online configurator
The difference between units is indicated in the selection and ordering data by gray backgrounds.
Using the modular system you can assemble switch variants
which are not available as complete units. Each complete unit
can also be supplied as a module.
A basic switch for the modular system comprises an enclosure
with a contact block and a cover. Among the basic switches the
following versions, for example, can be selected:
Basic enclosure with teflon plunger
Version with increased corrosion protection
Version with 2 LEDs
The online configurator helps you not only to select and order the
right position switch but also to create complete product documentation.
Product data sheets
Dimensional drawings
Operating travel diagrams
CAD data in 2D and 3D model images
Ordering data
Product photos
http://www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/konfiguratoren
Complete units
Ordering example
To be ordered:
Required:
Position switch according to EN 50047 in a plastic enclosure
Contact block with slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC
Angular roller lever, metal lever and plastic roller
Version
Complete units
Order No.
Complete units Enclosure width 31 mm

With metal lever and
plastic roller 13 mm
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 232-0BF10
Modular system
Ordering example 1
Ordering example 2
Required:
Angular roller lever, metal lever and plastic roller
Required:
Twist lever, high-grade steel lever and plastic roller
To be ordered separately:
To be ordered separately:
Version
Version
Modular system
Order No.
Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm
Order No.
With teflon plunger

1 NO + 1 NC
With teflon plunger

1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 232-0BC05
+
Operating mechanisms
3SE5 232-0BC05
+
Twist actuators

Metal lever,
plastic roller
Modular system
Twist actuators
3SE5 000-0AK00
3SE5 000-0AF10
Twist levers
High-grade steel lever,
plastic roller

3SE5 000-0AA31
13/7
3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Technical specifications
Type
3SE5 1.., 3SE5 2..
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Standards
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Degree of pollution acc. to EN 60664-1
400
Class 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
Rated operational voltage Ue
400 AC; over 300 V AC only for equal potential
Conventional thermal current Ith
10
Rated operational current Ie
2 contacts
3 contacts
With alternating current 50 / 60 Hz

- At 24 V
- A t 120 V
- A t 240 V
A
A
A
Ie / AC-15
6
6
3
Ie / AC-15
6
3
1.5
For direct current

- At 24 V
- A t 125 V
- A t 250 V
A
A
A
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
With DIAZED fuse links,

operational class gG
With miniature circuit breaker, Char. C
Short-circuit protection1)
Mechanical endurance
Basic switches
15 106 operating cycles
With spring rod, 3SE5 ...-..R..
With fork lever 3SE5 1..-..T..
Electrical endurance
With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
For AC-15 utilization category
0.1 106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 = 3 or 1.5 A at 240 V
For DC-13 utilization category
With DC current the endurance of the switching element depends not only on the breaking current
but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given.
Switching frequency
6000 operating cycles/h
Switching accuracy
mm
For repeated switching, measured at the plunger
of the contact block
0.05
Operating point with snap-action contacts
Independent of contact erosion, constant throughout the endurance of the switch
Rated data acc. to s, u and U.

Rated voltage
300
Uninterrupted current
Switching capacity
Heavy duty, A 300/B 300/Q 300
Type
3SE5 23.
3SE5 24.
3SE5 11.
3SE5 12.
3SE5 25.
Enclosures
Enclosures
Material
Zinc diecasting GD Zn Al4 Cu1
--
31
50
40
56
30
Dimensions acc. to EN
EN 50047
--
EN 50041
--
--
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
IP65
IP66/IP672)
Width
Ultramid A3X2G7
mm
2 contacts: IP20,
3 contacts: IP10
Ambient temperature
During operation
25 ... +85
25 ... +85
In operation, switch with LEDs
25 ... +70
--
S torage, transport
40 ... +90
40 ... +90
Any
Mounting position
Connection
1 (M20 1.5)
Cable entry
2 (M20 1.5)
1 (M20 1.5)
3 (M20 1.5)
--
Conductor cross-sections3)
Solid
mm
2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve
mm
2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Tightening torque, contact block
Nm
0.8 ... 1.0
Protective conductor connection inside enclosure
--
1)
Without any welds according to EN 60947-5-1.
2)
For twist actuators with spring rod and rod actuators: IP65/IP67.
13/8
M3.5
3)
--
For the maximum number of connectable conductors for the respective

contact block see operating instructions. Download from:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Type
3SE2 1, 3SE2 2, 3SE2 3, 3SE2 4, 3SE3 0
Exception: 3SE2 230-8..00
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Standards
500
Class 3
10
With alternating current 50 / 60 Hz

- At 24 V
- At 125 V
- At 230 V
- At 400 V
- At 500 V
A
A
A
A
A
Ie /AC-12
10
10
10
10
10
Ie /AC-15
10
10
6
4
3
For direct current

- At 24 V
- At 48 V
- At 110 V
- At 220 V
- At 440 V
A
A
A
A
A
Ie/DC-12
10
6
4
1
0.5
Ie /DC-13
10
4
1
0.4
0.2
Operational class gG
Characteristic quick
10
--
Ie/DC-12
10
6
4
1
0.5
Ie /DC-13
10
4
1
0.27
0.1
Short-circuit protection1),
DIAZED fuse links
With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26
contactors
0.5 106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
With DC current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the
voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching.
No generally valid information can be given.
Switching frequency
With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26
contactors
Switching accuracy
For repeated switching, measured at the
plunger of the contact block
mm
0.05
s, u and U rated data

Rated voltage
600
600
10
10
Switching capacity
Heavy duty, A 600/Q 600
Heavy duty, A 300/Q 600
Type
3SE2 200
3SE2 230
3SE2 210
3SE2 120
3SE2 100,
3SE2 303,
3SE2 404
3SE3 0
EN 50047
EN 50041
EN 50041
--
--
31
40
50
40
56
--
Enclosures
Enclosures
Type acc. to EN
Width
mm
Material
Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplast
IP67
IP66
Aluminum (GD - AlSi 12)
IP67
-IP20
Ambient temperature
During operation
30 ... +85 C
Mounting position
Any
Connection
1 (M20 1.5)
Cable entry
2 (M20 1.5) 1 (M20 1.5) 3 (M20 1.5) --
Conductor cross-sections
Solid
mm
2 2.5
mm
2 1.5
Protective conductor connection

Inside enclosure
1)
--
M3.5
--

13/9
3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

General Data
Schematics
3SE5 basic switches, enclosure widths 31 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm, 56 mm and open-type design, 30 mm
21
13
Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 ...-.K..., -.Q...
22
13
21
Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 ...-.L...
14 32 22
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
21 31 13
14
NSC0_00767
14
13 31 21
NSC0_00768
22
3SE5 ...-.C..., -.F..., -.G..., -.H..., -.N...
NSC0_00769
3SE5 ...-.B..., -.R...
3SE5 connector assignment

M12 connector socket, 4-pole
3SY3 127

3SY3 128
NSC0_00821
NSC0_00822

3SY3 134
Connector sockets, 6-pole + PE

3SY3 131
PE
NSC0_00929
3
4
7
8
Order No.
1
6
5
4
NSC0_00823
Connector
sockets
Contacts
LEDs
Pin assignment
Type
Version
Version
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
PE
M12 connector sockets (4-, 5- or 8-pole)

3SE5..4-.....-1AC4
3SY3 127
1 NO + 1 NC
--
21
22
13
14
--
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-.....-1AC5
3SY3 128
1 NO + 1 NC
--
21
22
13
14
PE
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-.....-1AE0
3SY3 127
2 NC
--
21
22
31
32
--
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-.....-1AE1
3SY3 128
2 NC
--
21
22
31
32
PE
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-.....-1AF3
3SY3 128
1 NO + 1 NC
2 LEDs
21
22
13/
LED gn
14/
LED ye
Ground
LED
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-.....-1AD4
3SY3 134
1 NO + 2 NC
2 LEDs
21
22
13/
LED gn
14/
LED ye
31
32
Ground
LED
PE
--
Connector sockets, 6-pole + PE

3SE5..5-.....-1AD0
3SY3 131
1 NO + 1 NC
--
21
22
13
14
--
--
--
--
3SE5..5-.....-1AD1
3SY3 131
1 NO + 2 NC
--
21
22
13
14
31
32
--
--
3SE5..5-.....-1AD2
3SY3 131
1 NO + 2 NC
2 LEDs
21
22
31
32
13/
LED gn
Ground
LED
--
--
3SE5..5-.....-1AF2
3SY3 131
1 NO + 1 NC
2 LEDs
21
22
13/
LED gn
14/
LED ye
--
Ground
LED
--
--
gn = Green
ye = Yellow
= Connected
13/10


3SE5, plastic enclosures
Enclosure width 31 mm to EN 50047
Selection and ordering data
Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Complete units1) Enclosure width 31 mm

Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 50047
With teflon plunger
Rounded
plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BC05
1 unit
102
0.065
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0CC05
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 1 NC -Snap-action contacts
Short-stroke, integrated2)
3SE5 232-0FC05
1 unit
102
0.065
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0GC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LC05
1 unit
102
0.075

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0CC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (250 V, 4 A)

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 234-0BC05-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.075
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 234-0HC05-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.075
2 NC
--
3SE5 234-0KC05-1AE0
1 unit
102
0.070
2 NC
--
3SE5 234-0LC05-1AE0
1 unit
102
0.080
With 2 LEDs, yellow/green
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 232-1KC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 232-1LC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 232-3KC05
1 unit
102
0.060
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 232-3LC05
1 unit
102
0.070
With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A),

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 234-1BC05-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 234-1CC05-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.080
Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 50047

With plastic roller 10 mm
Roller plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BD03
1 unit
102
0.060
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HD03
1 unit
102
0.060
3SE5 232-0FD03
1 unit
102
0.075
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KD03
1 unit
102
0.060
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LD03
1 unit
102
0.075
3SE5 232-0LD03-1AH0
1 unit
102
0.075
3SE5 234-0HD03-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.080
Actuator head rotated by 90

1 NO + 2 NC --

Snap-action contacts,
integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Roller plungers with central fixing

Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HD10
1 unit
102
0.090
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KD10
1 unit
102
0.090
Roller plunger
with central
fixing
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
For 1/2'' NPT adaptors and cable glands, see page 13/42
1)
Popular versions.
For operation, operating speed and travel, see pages 13/19 to 13/21.
2)
Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible.

Product Category: POSW
13/11

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 50047
With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm
Roller lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BE10
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HE10
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KE10
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LE10
1 unit
102
0.075
3SE5 234-0HE10-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.075

integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --

Angular roller
lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BF10
1 unit
102
0.070
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HF10
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KF10
1 unit
102
0.080
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LF10
1 unit
102
0.070
3SE5 232-0HR01
1 unit
102
0.095
Spring rods
Length 142.5 mm, with plastic plunger 50 mm
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 50047

Spring rod
With metal lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BK21
1 unit
102
0.085
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HK21
1 unit
102
0.085
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KK21
1 unit
102
0.100
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LK21
1 unit
102
0.100
3SE5 234-0HK21-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.110
3SE5 232-0HK60
1 unit
102
0.100

integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Twist lever
Twist levers, adjustable length

With metal lever with grid hole and
plastic roller 19 mm
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Twist lever, adjustable length
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BK50
1 unit
102
0.115
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HK50
1 unit
102
0.115
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LK50
1 unit
102
0.120
3SE5 232-0HK80
1 unit
102
0.110
3SE5 232-0HK82
1 unit
102
0.100
Rod actuators
With aluminum rod, length 200 mm
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
With plastic rod, length 200 mm

Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Rod actuator
1)
Popular versions.
2)
13/12


Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm (with rounded plunger1))

With teflon plunger
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0CC05
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0HC05
1 unit
102
0.065
3SE5 232-0FC05
1 unit
102
0.065
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0GC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LC05
1 unit
102
0.075
With increased corrosion protection3)

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0CC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 234-0BC05-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.075
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 234-0HC05-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.075
2 NC
--
3SE5 234-0KC05-1AE0
1 unit
102
0.070
2 NC
--
3SE5 234-0LC05-1AE0
1 unit
102
0.080
With M12 socket

1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 232-1KC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 232-1LC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 232-3KC05
1 unit
102
0.060
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 232-3LC05
1 unit
102
0.070
With 2 LEDs
and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 234-1BC05-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 234-1CC05-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.080
With M12 socket

and 2 LEDs
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K, or
positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits.

1)
On the plastic version the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded
plunger.
2)
3)
Use corresponding high-grade steel lever.

Note: For selection aid, see page 13/7.

13/13

Enclosure width 50 mm
Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 2 (M20 1.5)
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

Rounded plungers
With teflon plunger
Rounded
plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0CC05
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HC05
1 unit
102
0.065
3SE5 242-0FC05
1 unit
102
0.065
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0GC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0KC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LC05
1 unit
102
0.065

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 242-1KC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 242-1LC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 242-3KC05
1 unit
102
0.080
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 242-3LC05
1 unit
102
0.080
Roller plungers
With plastic roller 10 mm
Roller plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BD03
1 unit
102
0.075
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HD03
1 unit
102
0.075
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LD03
1 unit
102
0.080
Roller levers
Roller lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BE10
1 unit
102
0.080
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HE10
1 unit
102
0.080
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LE10
1 unit
102
0.090
3SE5 244-0LE10-1AE0
1 unit
102
0.100
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole right (250 V, 4 A)

2 NC
--
Twist levers
Twist lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BK21
1 unit
102
0.095
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HK21
1 unit
102
0.095
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LK21
1 unit
102
0.105
3SE5 242-0HK50
1 unit
102
0.110

Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Twist lever,
adjustable length
1)
Popular versions.
2)
13/14


Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Basic switches Enclosure width 50 mm (with rounded plunger1))

With teflon plunger
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0CC05
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HC05
1 unit
102
0.065
3SE5 242-0FC05
1 unit
102
0.065
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0GC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0KC05
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LC05
1 unit
102
0.065
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
Integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 242-0HC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.065
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 242-1KC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 242-1LC05
1 unit
102
0.070
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 242-3KC05
1 unit
102
0.080
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 242-3LC05
1 unit
102
0.080

1)
On the plastic version the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded
plunger.
2)
3)


13/15

Enclosure widths 31 mm and 50 mm
Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Plastic rollers
10
q A
3SE5 000-0AD03
1 unit
102
0.010
High-grade steel rollers
10
q B
3SE5 000-0AD04
1 unit
102
0.010
Plastic rollers
10
q B
3SE5 000-0AD10
1 unit
102
0.035
High-grade steel rollers
10
q B
3SE5 000-0AD11
1 unit
102
0.030
Roller plunger
Roller plungers with central fixing
With central
fixing
Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 50047
Roller lever
Metal lever, plastic roller
13
q A
3SE5 000-0AE10
1 unit
102
0.015
Metal lever, high-grade steel roller
13
q B
3SE5 000-0AE11
1 unit
102
0.020
High-grade steel lever, plastic roller
13
q B
3SE5 000-0AE12
1 unit
102
0.010
High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller
13
q B
3SE5 000-0AE13
1 unit
102
0.055
Angular roller
lever
13
q A
3SE5 000-0AF10
1 unit
102
0.015
13
q B
3SE5 000-0AF11
1 unit
102
0.013
13
q A
3SE5 000-0AF12
1 unit
102
0.015
13
q B
3SE5 000-0AF13
1 unit
102
0.020
Spring rods
(for switches with snap-action contacts only)
Plastic plunger:
Length 142.5 mm (spring 50 mm, plunger 50 mm)
3SE5 000-0AR01
1 unit
102
0.060
Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 10 mm)
3SE5 000-0AR03
1 unit
102
0.020
3SE5 000-0AR04
1 unit
102
0.040
3SE5 000-0AR02
1 unit
102
0.040
q A
3SE5 000-0AK00
1 unit
102
0.025
High-grade steel plunger:

Spring rod
Twist actuators
Twist actuators, plastic (without lever)
Switching right and/or left, adjustable
Levers for twist actuators

Twist actuator
Twist lever

19
q A
3SE5 000-0AA21
1 unit
102
0.010
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA22
1 unit
102
0.025
Metal lever, roller with ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA23
1 unit
102
0.020
30
q B
3SE5 000-0AA25
1 unit
102
0.010
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA31
1 unit
102
0.015
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA32
1 unit
102
0.022
Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA60
1 unit
102
0.025
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA61
1 unit
102
0.040
Metal lever, rubber roller
50
q B
3SE5 000-0AA68
1 unit
102
0.045
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA62
1 unit
102
0.025
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA63
1 unit
102
0.040

19
3SE5 000-0AA50
1 unit
102
0.025
19
3SE5 000-0AA51
1 unit
102
0.035
30
3SE5 000-0AA55
1 unit
102
0.025
50
3SE5 000-0AA58
1 unit
102
0.040
19
3SE5 000-0AA52
1 unit
102
0.025
19
3SE5 000-0AA53
1 unit
102
0.035
Rod actuators
Rod actuator
13/16
Aluminum rod, length 200 mm
3SE5 000-0AA80
1 unit
102
0.070
Spring rod, length 200 mm
3SE5 000-0AA81
1 unit
102
0.030
Plastic rod, length 200 mm
3SE5 000-0AA82
1 unit
102
0.020


2 contacts Moving double break contacts IP 67 degree of protection EN 50 047 Special width 50 mm
M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
31 mm wide
50 mm wide 2)
Actuator Enclosure
design to width
EN 50 047
3SE. position switches
with 2 slow-action contacts
with 2 slow-action make-beforebreak contacts
Weight
approx.
NSC00014
17 25
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
18 26
Identification number 20
acc. to EN 50 013
Order No.
1
Actuator )
Overtravel plunger3)
mm
acc. to EN 50 013
List
Price $
Order No.
1 unit
List
Price $
1 unit
kg
31
3SE2 200-7C
3SE2 200-3C
0.060
50
3SE2 210-3C
0.076
Roller plunger
31
3SE2 200-7D
3SE2 200-3D
0.065
(3SX3170)
50
3SE2 210-3D
0.085
Roller lever
31
3SE2 200-7E
3SE2 200-3E
0.065
(3SX3171)
50
3SE2 210-3E
0.085
Angular roller lever
31
3SE2 200-7F
3SE2 200-3F
0.065
(3SX3172)
50
3SE2 210-3F
0.085
Roller crank
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
(3SX3173)
31
3SE2 200-7G
3SE2 200-3G
0.080
50
3SE2 210-3G
0.100
adjustable length,
finely adjustable from
10 to 10
(3SX3174)
31
3SE2 200-7U
3SE2 200-3U
0.100
50
3SE2 210-3U
0.090
Rod actuator,
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
Molded plastic rod
(3SX3175)
Aluminium rod
(3SX3176)
Spring rod
(3SX3177)
31
3SE2 200-7W
3SE2 200-3W
0.100
50
3SE2 210-3W
0.115
31
3SE2 200-7V
3SE2 200-3V
0.100
50
3SE2 210-3V
0.125
31
3SE2 200-7S
3SE2 200-3S
0.110
50
3SE2 210-3S
0.145
Overtravel plunger,
central fixing with
M 18 1 thread
(3SX3180)
31
3SE2 200-7L
3SE2 200-3L
0.070
50
3SE2 210-3L
0.100
Roller plunger,
central fixing with
M 18 1 thread
(3SX3181)
31
3SE2 200-7M
3SE2 200-3M
0.085
50
3SE2 210-3M
0.130
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/23 to 13/26.
Positive opening acc. to

IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.

1) The actuator heads can be subsequently

exchanged (see Page 13/18).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/42.
Product Category: LIMT
3) Switch body with contact block. All operating

heads fit on these switch bodies.
13/17

Accessories
Actuators for 3SE2 200 and 3SE2 210 position switches
The actuator heads can be subsequently replaced with other
variants 1).
The basic version is the 3SE2

2.0-.C overtravel plunger. All the
actuator heads listed below can

be fitted to this.
Actuator with mounting screws
Diag.
No.
Roller plunger
For position switches

3SE2 200 @@
3SE2 210 @@
0.012
3SX3267
0.020
standard roller
3SX3171
0.009
stainless steel roller
3SX3276
0.020
3SX3172
0.010
3SX3274
0.015
3SX3270
0.020
3SX3173
0.030
3SX3271
0.020
3SX3174
0.040
Roller lever
. E
. F
standard roller
5
1 unit
Weight
approx.
kg
3SX3170
List
Price $
. D
standard roller
Order No.
Not
Shown
Roller crank operating head

without lever
Roller crank
finely adjustable from 10 to 10
. G
standard roller
8
lever with stainless steel roller

(operating head not included)
Not
Shown
Adjustable length, finely adjustable

from 10 to 10
. U
standard roller
9
lever with stainless steel roller

Rod actuator
finely adjustable form 10 to 10
molded plastic rod, 200 mm
. W
3SX3175
0.040
molded plastic rod, 300 mm

Not
Shown
. W
3SX3300
0.060
aluminum rod
. V
3SX3176
0.048
spring rod
. S
3SX3177
0.055
Overtravel plunger, central fixing

with M 18 x 1 thread
. L
3SX3180
0.027
Roller plunger, central fixing with

M 18 x 1 thread
. M
3SX3181
0.027
1) Not for position switches with separate

actuators and for 3SE. 2001XH and 3SE. 210
1XH position switches.
13/18
2) Not for snap action contacts.


Configuration
Actuation and operating travel (angle) for enclosure width 31 mm and 50 mm
Actuation along plunger axis
-.BC05
-.CC05, -.HC05
Minimum force required

in direction of operation: 18 N
5,5
mm
1,5
1,0
1,3
3,0
3,0
5,5
5,5
3SE5 2..-..F1.
-.BF10
-.HF10
mm
NSC0_00858a
12,5
11,9
11,0
*
0
2,3
mm
mm
Short stroke
vmax
Roller plungers
Lateral actuation
3SE5 2..-..D03, -..D04 3SE5 2..-..D10, -..D11 1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 2..-.BD03
21
13
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00769
30
14
42,4
18
0
10
0
NSC0_00878
30
22
Central fixing
10
NSC0_00837a
mm
3,4 4,0
4,8
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
14
3SE5 2..-.KD03, -.KD10
0
NSC0_00770
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00839a
21-22
31-32
13-14
mm
4,7
5,5
NSC0_00838a
13-14
21-22
mm
2,8 3,6
4,6
NSC0_00841
13-14
21-22
mm 0,9 2,6
4,6
Short stroke
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 2..-.LD03
14 32 22
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head1)
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 2..-.HD03, -.HD10
1 NO + 1 NC
22 32 14
1)
14
21-22
13-14
vmax = 1 m/s
mm
Lateral actuation
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00882
Form C
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00767
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00767
Operating point acc. to EN 50047

(snap-action)
Operating point on return (snap-action)
Positive opening acc. to EN 60947-5-1
Direction of operation
Max. actuating speed
13,8
13,0
12,2
Switching interval 2 2 mm
NSC0_00768
Operation by bar (standard)
5,5
mm
3,2
NSC0_00843
NSC0_00858a
13,2
13-14
21-22

12,5
11,9
11,0
13-14
21-22
mm
vmax = 1 m/s
14,2
13,6
13,0
0,8
-.FC05 + head1) -.GC05 + head1) -.LF10
NSC0_00859a
14,8
14,2
13,5
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
13-14
22,5
13
30
8,5
NSC0_00857a
30,4
17
NSC0_00886
mm
5,5
Short stroke
-.KF10
2,2
3,0
5,5
mm
0,5
NSC0_00834a
3,2
3,8
NSC0_00832a
3,1
3,5
1,9
NSC0_00833a
2,6
NSC0_00831a
vmax = 1 m/s
2,4
-.LC05
NSC0_00860a
mm
-.GC05
NSC0_00835a
1,0
7,7
NSC0_00876
mm
-.FC05
13-14
21-22
21-22
31-32
13-14
mm
21-22
13-14
-.KC05
13-14
21-22
Rounded plungers, type B

3SE5 2..-..C05
NSC0_00768
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
13-14
31-32
21-22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
13-14
31-32
21-22
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00836a
21
13
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
14 32 22
13-14
21-22
Contact closed
Contact open
1 NO + 1 NC
22
14
1 NO + 2 NC
22 32 14
13-14
21-22
vmax
1 NO + 1 NC
22
14
NSC0_00767
NSC0_00770

(snap-action)
NSC0_00769
NSC0_00840a
13-14
31-32
21-22
mm
3,2 3,9
4,9
The basic switch and actuator headactuator head must be ordered separately.

13/19

Configuration
Roller levers, type E

14
NSC0_00849a
14
22
21-22
13-14
mm
12,5 13,2 13,8
13
21
Ident. No. 11
22
vmax = 1 m/s
13
21
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 2..-.KE10
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
Twist levers1), type A
13
NSC0_00888
20,8
30
13,0 13,8 14,4
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
22
3SE5 2..-.BK21
14
21
13
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00865a
36
38 40
21-22
13-14
90
14
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
14
13
21
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 2..-.KK21
0
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
Twist levers1), adjustable length
3SE5 2..-.BC05 + head2)
19
14
21
13
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00865a
36
38 40
21-22
13-14
90
14
vmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
in direction of operation: 0.25 Nm
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
Adjustment of the lever in increments of 10, maximum deflection 90.
13/20
NSC0_00867a
36 38 40
2)
21-22
31-32
13-14
90
NSC0_00852a
13-14
21-22
31-32
mm
10,6 11,4 11,8
NSC0_00866a
34 36 38
13-14
21-22
90
NSC0_00926
7,5 22 44
13-14
21-22
90
34 36 44
NSC0_00868a
13-14
31-32
21-22
90
3SE5 2..-.HK60
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00866a
34 36 38
13-14
21-22
90
NSC0_00926
7,5 22 44
13-14
21-22
90
Short stroke
3SE5 2..-.LC05 + head2)
1 NO + 2 NC
14 32 22
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head2)
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 2..-.KC05 + head2)
13
Deflection in direction of rotation

1 NO + 1 NC
14
1 NO + 2 NC
1)
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00889
44 ... 114
30
22
6,9
3SE5 2..-.LK21
0
14 32 22

1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00769
3SE5 2..-..K6.
36 38 40
21-22
31-32
13-14
90
mm 2,3
Short stroke
1 NO + 2 NC
NSC0_00867a
13-14
21-22
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head2)
22
vmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
NSC0_00842
3SE5 2..-.HK21
1 NO + 1 NC

1 NO + 1 NC
13-14
21-22
mm 9,4 10,4 11,0
3SE5 2..-.LE10
14 32 22

1 NO + 1 NC
19
21-22
31-32
13-14
NSC0_00769
3SE5 2..-..K2.
NSC0_00851a
NSC0_00850a
Short stroke
1 NO + 2 NC
mm
NSC0_00767
14
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head2)
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00768
21
13
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 2..-.HE10
NSC0_00767
30
NSC0_00884
26,5
14
R
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00767
22
8,5
Lateral actuation
3SE5 2..-.BE10
NSC0_00767
14,7
13
Lateral actuation
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00769
3SE5 2..-..E1.
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00768
vmax
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00767
NSC0_00767

(snap-action)
NSC0_00768
NSC0_00868a
34 36 44
13-14
31-32
21-22
90
The basic switch and actuator head must be ordered separately.


19
22
14
30
21
13
Ident. No. 11
44 ... 114
3SE5 2..-.BK50
NSC0_00908
36 38

1 NO + 1 NC
13-14
21-22
90
14
13
21
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 2..-.KC05 + head2)
1 NO + 2 NC
xvmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
Rod actuators1), type D
NSC0_00910
36 38
13-14
21-22
31-32
90
NSC0_00767
22
3SE5 2..-.BC05 + head2)
1 NO + 1 NC
14
113 ... 203
21
13
Ident. No. 11
0
NSC0_00769
22
NSC0_00908
36 38
13-14
21-22
90
14
13
21
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00890
vmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00770
NSC0_00910
36 38
13-14
21-22
31-32
90
34 36
13-14
21-22
31-32
90
NSC0_00909
34 36
13-14
21-22
90
NSC0_00927
7,5 22
13-14
21-22
90
3SE5 2..-.LC05 + head2)
14 32 22
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
Short stroke
1 NO + 2 NC
Spring rods
NSC0_00911
34 36
13-14
21-22
31-32
90
Deflection of spring rod

1 NO + 1 NC
242,3
142,3
NSC0_00891
22
1)
2)
15
NSC0_00844
13-14
21-22
2,5
3SE5 2..-.LC05 + head2)

NSC0_00874a
0
14 32 22
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
13-14
21-22
Short stroke
1 NO + 2 NC
NSC0_00873a
NSC0_00768
0
vmax = 1 m/s
14
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head2)
1 NO + 1 NC
13
21
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 2..-.HR01
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
75,8
14
NSC0_00767
The spring rods can be used only with snap-action

contacts.
NSC0_00767
3SE5 2..-..R0.

NSC0_00911
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head2)
22
13
21
Ident. No. 11
0
7,5 22
13-14
21-22
90
3SE5 2..-.HK80, -.HK82
22
11
22 32 14
NSC0_00927

1 NO + 1 NC
14
3SE5 2..-.KC05 + head2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
13-14
21-22
90
3SE5 2..-.LK50
14 32 22
3SE5 2..-..K8.
34 36
Short stroke
1 NO + 2 NC
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
NSC0_00909
NSC0_00768
NSC0_00928
14
3SE5 2..-.FC05 + head2)
1 NO + 1 NC
13
21
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 2..-.HK50
22
NSC0_00767
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00769
3SE5 2..-..K5.
NSC0_00767
vmax
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00767
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00768
Operating point acc. to EN 50041/47

(snap-action)
13-14
31-32
21-22
7
15
13/21

Basic switches
12,5
Enclosure width 50 mm,

with M20 1.5 connecting thread
3SE5 242
35,9
4
3
4x6
15
33
6,9
13
12,5
22
NSC0_00752
53
40
42
50
5 22
4x6
4x5
18,5
M20x1,5
7x3

rear with fixing holes
3SE5 242
7,7
4,4
4
20
22
5 22
M12x1
22
NSC0_00802
M20x1,5
33
31
4,3
7x3
14
15
M20x1,5
6,9
13
68
NSC0_00751
68
31
Contact block
(integrated)
12,5
20
22
20
22
13
13
Contact block
(replaceable)
4,3
NSC0_00906
4,3
Enclosure width 31 mm, EN 50047,

rear with fixing holes
3SE5 232
13
7,7
7,7

with M12 connector socket
3SE5 234
42,8

3SE5 232
4x5
NSC0_00907
15
33
5,5
Operating mechanisms for enclosure width 31 and 50 mm

Roller plunger, type C acc. to EN 50047
10
Roller plunger with central fixing

10
4,8
Roller lever, type E acc. to EN 50047
14,7
4,8
18
22,5
24
20,8
13
NSC0_00789a
NSC0_00788
8,5
24
0
34
26,5
NSC0_00787
20,8
7
30,4
32
7,2
23,65
30
13
R1
19
23
Twist lever, roller 30 mm
30
7,2
23,65
0
23
24
24
Twist lever, type A acc. to EN 50047
13
8,5
8,5
R1
NSC0_00785
23
7
4
35,9
42,4
11,5
13
NSC0_00792a
NSC0_00786
8,5
SW24
0
37
Additional operating mechanisms, see page 13/50.
13/22


Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation by a bar
vmax
operat. pt. acc. to EN 50 047

max. operating speed
S
H
travel acc. to EN 50 047

travel difference
direction of operation
Switch blocks
Nominal travel
and related terminals
Terminal designation
acc. to EN 50 013
0-line
S
*
**
Overtravel plunger, Type B

3SE2 200.C,
3SE2 210.C
vmax. = 1 m/s
Switch blocks
Nominal travel
reference line acc. to EN 50 047

contact closed
contact open
operating point on return
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
along plunger axis
perpendicular to plunger axis
along plunger axis
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC
with make-beforebreak
2 NO
NSC00014
17 25
Ident. No. 20
18 26
Ident. No. 11
vmax. = 0.5 m/s

Roller plunger, Type C

3SE2 200.D,
3SE2 210.D
along plunger axis
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
17 25
NSC00014
vmax. = 1 m/s
along plunger axis

18 26
Ident. No. 20
Ident. No. 11
vmax. = 1 m/s

13/23

Operation by a bar
vmax
S
H
operating point acc. to

EN 50 047
travel difference
Switch blocks
Nominal travel
terminal designation
acc. to EN 50 013
0-line
S
*
**
Roller lever, Type E

3SE2 200.E,
3SE2 210.E
Switch blocks
Nominal travel

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3

1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
With make-beforebreak
NSC00014
17 25
18 26
vmax. = 1 m/s
Ident. No. 11

along plunger axis

3SE2 200.F,
3SE2 210.F
along plunger axis
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC

The approach example is applicable for
3SE2 200 and is not possible for
3SE2 210 in this form.
13/24
17 25
NSC00014
vmax. = 1 m/s
2 NO
18 26
Ident. No. 20
Ident. No. 11


Contact blocks
Nominal travel (measured)
vmax
S
acc. to EN 50013
0-line
S

Operating travel acc. to
EN 50047
Travel difference
**
Twist levers, type A
Contact blocks
Lateral actuation
3SE2 200.G1)
Nominal travel
Reference line acc. to EN 50047

Operating travel acc. to EN 50047
Contact closed
Contact open
Positive opening q acc. to
IEC 60947-5-1
Lateral actuation
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 2.0-0G
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC with
make-before-break
2 NC
3SE2 2.0-6G
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 2.0-3G
2 NO
3SE2 2.0-7G
Lever adjustable in increments of 10

vmax = 1 m/s
NSC00014
17 25
18 26

Ident. No. 11

0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 2.0-0U
2 NC
3SE2 2.0-6U
65
20
>
=

3SE2 200.U, 3SE2 210.U
30
Ident. No. 20
19
1 NO + 1 NC with
make-before-break
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 2.0-3U
2 NO
3SE2 2.0-7U
17 25
NSC00014
>
= 41
> 39
=
51 ... 120
Ident. No. 11
18 26
NSC 00060

vmax = 1 m/s
Ident. No. 11
Rod actuators
Ident. No. 20
3SE2 200.W, 3SE2 210.W
3SE2 200.V, 3SE2 210.V
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 2.0-0W, -0V, -0S

2 NC
3SE2 2.0-6W, -0V, -0S
3SE2 200.S, 3SE2 210.S
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC with
make-before-break
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 2.0-3W, -0V, -0S
2 NO
3SE2 2.0-7W, -0V, -0S
NSC00014
17 25
18 26
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 20

vmax = 1.5 m/s
1)
Not for 3SE2 200.GA. hinge switches.

13/25

Operation by a bar
vmax
S
H
operating point acc. to

EN 50 047
travel difference
Switch blocks
Nominal travel
terminal designation
acc. to EN 50 013
0-line
S
*
**
Overtravel plunger
Switch blocks
Nominal travel

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
along plunger axis
along plunger axis
Central mounting with M 18 thread
3SE2 200.L,
3SE2 210.L
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
NSC00014
17 25
vmax. = 1 m/s
18 26
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 20
vmax. = 0.5 m/s

Overtravel plunger
Central mounting with M 18 thread
3SE2 200.M,
3SE2 210.M
vmax. = 1 m/s
vmax. = 1 m/s


13/26


Dimension drawings
3SE2 200 and 3SE2 210
3SE2 200, narrow enclosure acc. to EN 50 047,
with overtravel plunger, Type B
3SE2 210, wide enclosure,

with overtravel plunger
Roller plunger, Type C
Roller lever, Type E
* Lever in final position
Roller crank, Type A
Overtravel plunger,
central fixing with M 18 1 thread
Roller plunger,
central fixing with M 18 1 thread
Roller crank, adjustable length
Rod actuator
Wobble spring

13/27

2 contacts Moving double break contacts IP 66 degree of protection EN 50 041 M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
40 mm wide 2)
6 mm stroke
Actuator
design to
EN 50 041
acc. to EN 50 013
Order No.
List
Price $
6 mm stroke
acc. to EN 50 013
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
6 mm stroke
acc. to EN 50 013
Order No.
List
Price $
Actuator 1)
Diagram
No.
Overtravel plunger
3SE2 230-0C
3SE2 230-6C
3SE2 230-7C
0.115
Roller plunger
3SE2 230-0D
3SE2 230-6D
3SE2 230-7D
0.120
Roller lever
3SE2 230-0E
3SE2 230-6E
3SE2 230-7E
0.130
Angular roller lever,

molded plastic act.
3SE2 230-0F
3SE2 230-6F
3SE2 230-7F
0.135
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
3SE2 230-0GW
3SE2 230-6GW
3SE2 230-7GW
0.150
adjustable length,
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
3SE2 230-0U
3SE2 230-6U
3SE2 230-7U
0.160
Rod actuator
molded plastic rod
3SE2 230-0W
3SE2 230-6W
3SE2 230-7W
0.160
Aluminium rod
3SE2 230-0V
3SE2 230-6V
3SE2 230-7V
0.170
3SE2 230-0A
3SE2 230-6A
3SE2 230-7A
0.095
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
kg
Roller crank
Switch body with

switch block without
actuator
40 mm wide 2)
with 2 slow-action make

before-break contacts
with 2 snap-action contacts
NSC00014
17 25
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
18 26
acc. to EN 50 013
7
acc. to EN 50 013
acc. to EN 50 013
Overtravel plunger
3SE2 230-3C
3SE2 230-1C
3SE2 230-8CV00
0.125
Roller plunger
3SE2 230-3D
3SE2 230-1D
3SE2 230-8DV00
0.130
Roller lever
3SE2 230-3E
3SE2 230-1E
3SE2 230-8EV00
0.130
Angular roller lever,

molded plastic act.
3SE2 230-3F
3SE2 230-1F
3SE2 230-8FV00
0.132
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
3SE2 230-3GW
3SE2 230-1GW
3SE2 230-8GW00
0.155
adjustable length,
10 to 10
3SE2 230-1U
3SE2 230-8UW00
0.160
Rod actuator
molded plastic
3SE2 230-1W
3SE2 230-8WW00
0.160
Aluminium
3SE2 230-1V
3SE2 230-8VW00
0.170
3SE2 230-1R
3SE2 230-8RV00
0.150
3SE2 230-3A
3SE2 230-1A
3SE2 230-8AV00
0.095
Roller crank
8
Wobble spring
Switch body with

switch block without
actuator
The switch has the same construction as the 3SE2 120-.. metal-enclosed switch detailed on
Pages 13/30. For operation, operating speed and travel or angle see Pages 13/52 to 13/55.
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1,

Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
13/28

replaced with other variants (see following
page).


Actuator heads for 3SE2 230 position switches
The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged.
Operating mechanism with mounting screws and
gasket
3SX3160

3SE. 2230
List
Price $
1 unit
Weight
approx.
kg
3SX3160
0.021
molded plastic roller, 13 mm dia. (standard)
3SX3161
0.024
stainless steel roller, 13 mm dia.
3SX3262
0.010
3SX3164
0.034
3SX3168
0.036
3SX3167
0.048
3SX3163
0.058
Overtravel plunger
.C
Roller plunger
.C
.E
Roller lever
3SX3161
Order No.
.F

Roller crank
(supplied with operating head & lever)
.GW

3SX3164
Adjustable Roller crank

(supplied with operating head & adjustable lever)
.U

Rod Actuator, adjustable length
3SX3168
(supplied with operating head & rod)

aluminum rod
.V
3SX3165
0.069
.W
3SX3166
0.061
spring 50 mm, plastic rod 50 mm (standard)
3SX3210
0.051
spring 50 mm, stainless steel rod 50 mm
3SX3281
0.060
spring 150 mm, stainless steel rod 50 mm
3SX3311
0.080
spring 150 mm, plastic rod 50 mm
3SX3283
0.070
3SX3305
0.030
Wobble
3SX3165
spring1)
.R
standard
Roller crank operating head

(without lever)
.GW, -.U, -.V, -.W
Roller crank levers

3SX3210
3SX3167
adjustable length, finely adjustable from

10 to 10
-.U
3SX3213
0.024
stainless steel roller, 19 mm dia.
3SX3268
0.030
molded plastic roller, 30 mm dia.
3SX3302
0.025
rubber roller, 50 mm dia.
3SX3304
0.020
3SX3163
1) Only for snap-action contacts.

13/29

Dimension drawings
3SE2 230 position switches
3SE2 230, enclosure acc. to EN 50 041,
with overtravel plunger, Type B
10
Roller plunger, type C
Roller lever
22
6,5
31
16
5,3
NSC00328
60
75
30
40
7,3x5,3
M20 x 1.5
15
39
R o ller cran k, t yp e A
Spring rod
Rod actuator, Type D
13/30


3SE5, metal enclosures
Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BC02
1 unit
102
0.290
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CC02
1 unit
102
0.290
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0KC02
1 unit
102
0.300
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LC02
1 unit
102
0.300
Rounded
plunger

With high-grade steel roller 13 mm, with 3 mm
overtravel
Roller plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BD02
1 unit
102
0.310
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CD02
1 unit
102
0.310
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0KD02
1 unit
102
0.320
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LD02
1 unit
102
0.320
3SE5 114-1CD02-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.320

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
Roller levers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BE01
1 unit
102
0.300
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CE01
1 unit
102
0.300
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0KE01
1 unit
102
0.310
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LE01
1 unit
102
0.310
Roller lever

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BF01
1 unit
102
0.310
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CF01
1 unit
102
0.310
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LF01
1 unit
102
0.320
3SE5 112-0CR01
1 unit
102
0.315
Angular roller
lever
Spring rods
1 NO + 1 NC --
Spring rod
1)
Popular versions.

13/31

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BH01
1 unit
102
0.345
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CH01
1 unit
102
0.345
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0KH01
1 unit
102
0.355
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LH01
1 unit
102
0.355
3SE5 114-0CH01-1AC5
1 unit
102
0.350
3SE5 114-1CH01-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.355

Twist lever
1 NO + 1 NC --

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
With metal lever 27 mm and high-grade steel roller 19 mm

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BH02
1 unit
102
0.355
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CH02
1 unit
102
0.355
3SE5 114-1CH02-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.365

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC --

With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BH60
1 unit
102
0.360
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CH60
1 unit
102
0.360
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LH60
1 unit
102
0.370
Twist lever, adjustable length,

with grid hole
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BH50
1 unit
102
0.360
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CH50
1 unit
102
0.360
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LH50
1 unit
102
0.370
3SE5 114-1LH50-1AD4
1 unit
102
0.310
3SE5 112-0CH51
1 unit
102
0.370
3SE5 112-0CT11
1 unit
102
0.360
3SE5 112-0CH80
1 unit
102
0.300
3SE5 112-0CH82
1 unit
102
0.300

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
With metal lever and high-grade steel roller 19 mm

1 NO + 1 NC --
Fork levers, latching

With metal lever and 2 plastic rollers 19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
Fork lever
Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 50041

1 NO + 1 NC --

1 NO + 1 NC --
Rod actuator
1)
Popular versions.
13/32


Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

With M20 1.5 connecting thread
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BA00
1 unit
102
0.260
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CA00
1 unit
102
0.260
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0KA00
1 unit
102
0.270
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LA00
1 unit
102
0.270
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0BA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.260
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 112-0CA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.260
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0KA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.270
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0LA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.270
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 114-0BA00-1AC5
1 unit
102
0.270
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 114-0CA00-1AC5
1 unit
102
0.270
2 NC
--
3SE5 114-0KA00-1AE1
1 unit
102
0.280
2 NC
--
3SE5 114-0LA00-1AE1
1 unit
102
0.280
With M12 socket

With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (250 V, 10 A)
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 115-0KA00-1AD1
1 unit
102
0.280
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 115-0LA00-1AD1
1 unit
102
0.280
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 115-0CA00-1AD0
1 unit
102
0.350
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (250 V, 10 A),

and quick-release device
With socket,
6-pole + PE
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 112-1KA00
1 unit
102
0.280
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 112-1LA00
1 unit
102
0.280
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 112-3KA00
1 unit
102
0.280
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 112-3LA00
1 unit
102
0.280
With 2 LEDs
and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 114-1BA00-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.280
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 114-1CA00-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.280
3SE5 114-1LA00-1AD4
1 unit
102
0.310

and 2 LEDs
With M12 socket Snap-action contacts
and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (10 A),

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 115-1BA00-1AF2
1 unit
102
0.290
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 115-1CA00-1AF2
1 unit
102
0.290
2 NC
3SE5 115-1LA00-1AD2
1 unit
102
0.300
24 V DC
With socket,
6-pole + PE,
and 2 LEDs

1)


13/33

Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

Rounded plungers
With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BC02
1 unit
102
0.355
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CC02
1 unit
102
0.355
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0KC02
1 unit
102
0.365
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LC02
1 unit
102
0.365
Rounded
plunger
Roller plungers
With high-grade steel roller 13 mm, with 3 mm overtravel
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BD02
1 unit
102
0.375
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CD02
1 unit
102
0.250
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0KD02
1 unit
102
0.250
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LD02
1 unit
102
0.250
Roller plunger
Roller levers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BE01
1 unit
102
0.365
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CE01
1 unit
102
0.365
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0KE01
1 unit
102
0.375
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LE01
1 unit
102
0.375
3SE5 122-0CE02
1 unit
102
0.250
With metal lever and high-grade steel roller 22 mm

Roller lever
1 NO + 1 NC --

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BF01
1 unit
102
0.380
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CF01
1 unit
102
0.380
3SE5 122-0CR01
1 unit
102
0.250
Angular roller
lever
Spring rods
1 NO + 1 NC --
Spring rod
1)
Popular versions.
13/34


Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

Twist levers
Twist lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BH01
1 unit
102
0.410
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CH01
1 unit
102
0.410
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0KH01
1 unit
102
0.420
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LH01
1 unit
102
0.420
With metal lever 27 mm and high-grade steel roller

19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CH02
1 unit
102
0.250
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LH02
1 unit
102
0.250

With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller
19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BH60
1 unit
102
0.250
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CH60
1 unit
102
0.250
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LH60
1 unit
102
0.250
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BH50
1 unit
102
0.420
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CH50
1 unit
102
0.420
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LH50
1 unit
102
0.430
3SE5 122-0CT11
1 unit
102
0.250
3SE5 122-0CH80
1 unit
102
0.250
3SE5 122-0CH82
1 unit
102
0.250
Fork levers, latching

With metal lever and 2 plastic rollers 19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
Fork lever
Rod actuators
1 NO + 1 NC --

1 NO + 1 NC --
Rod actuator
1)
Popular versions.

13/35

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

With 3 x M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BA00
1 unit
102
0.315
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CA00
1 unit
102
0.315
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0KA00
1 unit
102
0.325
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LA00
1 unit
102
0.325
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0BA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.315
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 122-0CA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.315
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0KA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.325
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0LA00-1CA0
1 unit
102
0.325
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 122-1KA00
1 unit
102
0.330
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 122-1LA00
1 unit
102
0.330
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 122-3KA00
1 unit
102
0.330
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 122-3LA00
1 unit
102
0.330
With 2 LEDs

1)
13/36



Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Order No.
mm
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List Price $
per PU
kg
q B
3SE5 000-0AC02
1 unit
102
0.030
13
q B
3SE5 000-0AD02
1 unit
102
0.050
High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel

High-grade steel roller, with 3 mm overtravel
Roller levers
Roller lever
22
q A
3SE5 000-0AE01
1 unit
102
0.045
22
q B
3SE5 000-0AE02
1 unit
102
0.065
22
q B
3SE5 000-0AE03
1 unit
102
0.040
22
q B
3SE5 000-0AE04
1 unit
102
0.065
Ang. roller lever
22
q A
3SE5 000-0AF01
1 unit
102
0.050
22
q B
3SE5 000-0AF02
1 unit
102
0.075
22
q B
3SE5 000-0AF03
1 unit
102
0.050
22
q B
3SE5 000-0AF04
1 unit
102
0.075
Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only)

Plastic plunger:
3SE5 000-0AR01
1 unit
102
0.060
Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 10 mm)
3SE5 000-0AR03
1 unit
102
0.020
3SE5 000-0AR04
1 unit
102
0.040
3SE5 000-0AR02
1 unit
102
0.040
For twist levers and rod actuators,

switching right and/or left, adjustable
q A
3SE5 000-0AH00
1 unit
102
0.070
For fork levers, latching
q B
3SE5 000-0AT10
1 unit
102
0.070
High-grade steel plunger:

Spring rod
Twist actuators
Twist actuators, metal (without lever)
Twist actuator
Levers for twist actuators

Twist levers 27 mm, type A acc. to EN 50041
Twist lever
19
q A
3SE5 000-0AA01
1 unit
102
0.015
19
q A
3SE5 000-0AA02
1 unit
102
0.035
Metal lever, roller with ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA03
1 unit
102
0.020
Metal lever, 2 plastic rollers
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA04
1 unit
102
0.015
30
q B
3SE5 000-0AA05
1 unit
102
0.015
50
q B
3SE5 000-0AA08
1 unit
102
0.030
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA11
1 unit
102
0.015
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA12
1 unit
102
0.025
Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA60
1 unit
102
0.025
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA61
1 unit
102
0.040
50
q B
3SE5 000-0AA68
1 unit
102
0.045
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA62
1 unit
102
0.025
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AA63
1 unit
102
0.040
Fork lever
19
3SE5 000-0AA50
1 unit
102
0.025
19
3SE5 000-0AA51
1 unit
102
0.035
30
3SE5 000-0AA55
1 unit
102
0.025
50
3SE5 000-0AA58
1 unit
102
0.040
19
3SE5 000-0AA52
1 unit
102
0.025
19
3SE5 000-0AA53
1 unit
102
0.035
Fork levers (for switches with snap-action contacts only)

2 metal levers, 2 plastic rollers
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AT01
1 unit
102
0.050
2 metal levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AT02
1 unit
102
0.050
2 high-grade steel levers, 2 plastic rollers
19
q B
3SE5 000-0AT03
1 unit
102
0.050
2 high-grade steel levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19
q B
3SE5 000-0AT04
1 unit
102
0.050
Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 50041

Rod actuator

Aluminum rod, length 200 mm
3SE5 000-0AA80
1 unit
102
0.070
3SE5 000-0AA81
1 unit
102
0.030
Plastic rod, length 200 mm
3SE5 000-0AA82
1 unit
102
0.020
13/37

3SE2 / 3SE3, metal enclosures
2 contacts Moving double break contacts IP 67 degree of protection EN 50 041
40 mm wide
56 mm wide 2)
Actuator Enclosure
design to width
EN 50 041
with 2 slow-action make beforebreak contacts
Weight
approx.
NSC00014
17 25
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
18 26
acc. to EN 50 013,
switch block 3SE3 000-7A
Order No.
Actuator 1)
Plunger
mm
(3SX3100)
Overtravel plunger
(3SX3106)
Roller plunger
(3SX3107)
Roller lever
Actuator made of
molded plastic
(3SX3102)
Actuator made of
molded plastic
(3SX3104)
List
Price $
acc. to EN 50 013,
switch block 3SE3 000-3A
Order No.
1 unit
List
Price $
1 unit
kg
40
3SE@ 1@0-7B
3SE@ 1@0-3B
0.195
56
3SE2 100-7B
3SE2 100-3B
0.220
40
3SE@ 1@0-7C
3SE@ 1@0-3C
0.230
56
3SE2 100-7C
3SE2 100-3C
0.259
40
3SE@ 1@0-7D
3SE@ 1@0-3D
0.252
56
3SE2 100-7D
3SE2 100-3D
0.277
40
3SE@ 1@0-7E
3SE@ 1@0-3E
0.209
56
3SE2 100-7E
3SE2 100-3E
0.239
40
3SE@ 1@0-7F
3SE@ 1@0-3F
0.220
56
3SE2 100-7F
3SE2 100-3F
0.236
Roller crank
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
(3SX3211 + 3SX3212)
adjustable length, finely

adjustable from
10 to 10
(3SX3211 + 3SX3213)
Rod actuator
40
3SE@ 1@0-7GW
3SE@ 1@0-3GW
0.305
56
3SE2 100-7GW
3SE2 100-3GW
0.328
40
3SE@ 1@0-7UW
3SE@ 1@0-3UW
0.315
56
3SE2 100-7UW
3SE2 100-3UW
0.336
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
Molded plastic
rod
(3SX3211 + 3SX3215)
Aluminum rod
(3SX3211 + 3SX3214)
Switch body
with switch block
without actuator
40
3SE@ 1@0-7WW
3SE@ 1@0-3WW
0.190
56
3SE2 100-7WW
3SE2 100-3WW
0.200
40
3SE@ 1@0-7VW
3SE@ 1@0-3VW
0.190
56
3SE2 100-7VW
3SE2 100-3VW
0.200
40
56
3SE@ 1@0-7A
3SE2 100-7A
3SE@ 1@0-3A
3SE2 100-3A
0.175
0.203
Order No. suffix

with metric connecting thread M 20 1.5
2 1@
2 0-0B
I.E. 3SE@
with 1/2 - NPT connecting thread
3
7 0-0B
I.E. 3SE@1 @
2.2
2.2
3.7
3.7

13/38

exchanged (see Page 13/41).


3 contacts Wide enclosure Moving double break contacts IP 67 degree of protection M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
56 mm wide 2)
Actuator
with mit 3 slow-action

contacts
with 3 slow-action makebefore-break contacts
with 3 slow-action
make-before-break
contacts
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
acc. to EN 50 013,
switch block
3SE3 003-1A
acc. to EN 50 013,
switch block
3SE3 003-2A
Identification No. 21
acc. to EN 50 013,
switch block
3SE3 003-3A
Order No.
Order No.
Order No.
3SE2 303-1B
3SE2 303-2B
3SE2 303-3B
0.310
3SE2 303-1C
3SE2 303-2C
3SE2 303-3C
0.332
3SE2 303-1D
3SE2 303-2D
3SE2 303-3D
0.356
3SE2 303-1E
3SE2 303-2E
3SE2 303-3E
0.314
3SE2 303-1F
3SE2 303-2F
3SE2 303-3F
0.330
3SE2 303-1GW
3SE2 303-2GW
3SE2 303-3GW
0.411
3SE2 303-1UW
3SE2 303-2UW
3SE2 303-3UW
0.415
3SE2 303-1WW
3SE2 303-2WW
3SE2 303-3WW
0.416
3SE2 303-1VW
3SE2 303-2VW
3SE2 303-3VW
0.425
1)
Plunger
Wght
approx.
List
Price $
1 unit
kg
(3SX3100)
Overtravel plunger
(3SX3106)
Roller plunger
(3SX3107)
Roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic
(3SX3102)
Actuator made of molded plastic
(3SX3104)
Roller crank
(3SX3211 + 3SX3212)
adjustable length, finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
(3SX3211 + 3SX3213)
Rod actuator
Molded plastic rod
(3SX3211 + 3SX3215)
Aluminum rod
(3SX3211 + 3SX3214)



exchanged (see page 13/41).
13/39

4 contacts Wide enclosure Moving double-break contacts Degree of protection IP 67 M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
56 mm wide 2)
with 4 slow-action make beforebreak contacts
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
6 mm stroke
acc. to EN 50 013
acc. to EN 50 013
acc. to EN 50 013
Switch block 3SE3 000-1A

Order No.
1
Actuator )

List
Price $
Order No.
1 unit
List
Price $
Wght
approx.

Order No.
1 unit
List
Price $
1 unit
kg
Plunger
(3SX3100)
3SE2 404-1B
3SE2 404-0B
3SE2 404-2B
0.380
Overtravel plunger
(3SX3106)
3SE2 404-1C
3SE2 404-0C
3SE2 404-2C
0.400
Roller plunger
(3SX3107)
3SE2 404-1D
3SE2 404-0D
3SE2 404-2D
0.420
Roller lever
3SE2 404-1E
3SE2 404-0E
3SE2 404-2E
0.381
3SE2 404-1F
3SE2 404-0F
3SE2 404-2F
0.400
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
(3SX3211+3SX3212)
3SE2 404-1GW
3SE2 404-0GW
3SE2 404-2GW
0.480
adjustable length,
finely adjustable
from 10 to 10
(3SX3211+3SX3213)
3SE2 404-1UW
3SE2 404-0UW
3SE2 404-2UW
0.479
Molded plastic
rod
(3SX3211+3SX3215)
3SE2 404-1WW
3SE2 404-0WW
3SE2 404-2WW
0.490
Aluminum rod
(3SX3211+3SX3214)
3SE2 404-1VW
3SE2 404-0VW
3SE2 404-2VW
0.490
Fork lever
(3SX3127+3SX3115)
3SE2 404-1T
0.515
Actuator made of
molded plastic
(3SX3102)
Actuator made of
molded plastic
(3SX3104)
Roller crank
Rod actuator
10 to 10
Positive opening acc. to

IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K,
and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
13/40

exchanged (see page 13/41).


Accessories
Actuator heads lamps
The actuator heads of the
position switches can be
subsequently exchanged
for other variants.
Actuators with mounting screws
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
1 unit
kg
3SE2 100-@@
3SE2 120-@@
3SE2 230-@@
3SE2 303-@@
3SE2 404-@@
3SE3 170-@@
Plunger
.B
3SX3 100
0.018
.C
3SX3 106
0.056
3SX3 107
3SX3 263
0.082
0.080
3SX3 102
3SX3 275
0.034
0.050
3SX3 104
3SX3 276
0.043
0.050
includes screws and gasket

Overtravel plunger
3SX3 211
Roller plunger
standard roller
.D
Roller lever
standard roller
.E

standard roller
.F
Roller crank operating heads

(without lever, includes screws & gasket)
standard momentary (spring return),
left and right operation
-.GW, -.U, -.V, -.W
3SX3 211
0.112
momentary (spring return),

left and/or right operation
-.GW, -.U, -.V, -.W
3SX3 307
0.085
-1T
3SX3 127
0.131
standard, plastic roller, 19 mm dia.
3SX3 212
0.020
stanless steel roller, 19 mm dia.
3SX3 265
0.025
plastic roller, 30 mm dia.
3SX3 278
0.020
3SX3 301
0.020
3SX3 280
0.020
standard, plastic roller, 19 mm dia.
3SX3 213
0.024
stanless steel roller, 19 mm dia.
3SX3 268
0.030
3SX3 302
0.025
3SX3 304
0.020
3SY3 024
0.036
standard, plastic rollers, 19 mm dia.
3SX3 115
0.032
stainless steel rollers, 19 mm dia.
3SX3 266
0.050
fork lever, maintained

3SX3 212
3SX3 213
Roller crank levers

.GW
Adjustable length roller crank

.UW
levers with clamp
levers without clamp

3SX3 115
3SX3 215
Fork lever
-1T
Rod actuator
with support
standard, plastic rod
.WW
3SX3 215
0.031
aluminum rod
.VW
3SX3 214
0.032
standard, plastic rod
.WW
3SX3 000
0.008
aluminum rod
.VW
3SX3 001
0.016
without support

13/41
3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

Accessories
Version
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Plug-in connections for M20 1.5 connecting threads
3SY3 136
3SY3 131
3SY3 127
3RX8 000
3SY3 134
Connector sockets (6-pole+PE), for M201.5 B

For max. 250 V, 10 A
With 0.75 mm2 connecting cable,
plastic, degree of protection IP65,
ambient temperature 40 to +90 C
3SY3 131
1 unit
102
0.030
A
Cable boxes (6-pole + PE)1)
With terminal compartment, can be preassembled, plastic, degree of protection IP65
3SY3 136
1 unit
102
0.065
Connector sockets (4-pole), M12,

for M20 1.5, fixed
For max 250 V, 4 A, Uimp = 2500 V
With four 0.25 mm2 connecting cables,
3SY3 127
1 unit
102
0.010
Cable boxes (4-pole), M12, with terminal

compartment, can be pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CB45
1 unit
574
0.015
Angular cable boxes (4-pole), M12, with ter- A

minal compartment, can be pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CC45
1 unit
574
0.015

for M20 1.5, fixed
For max 125 V, 4 A, Uimp = 1500 V
With five 0.25 mm2 connecting cables,
3SY3 128
1 unit
102
0.010
Cable boxes (5-pole), M12, with terminal

compartment, can be pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CB55
1 unit
574
0.016
Angular cable boxes (5-pole), M12, with ter- A

minal compartment, can be pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CC55
1 unit
574
0.016

for M20 1.5, fixed, metal version
For max 30 V, 2 A, Uimp = 800 V
With eight 0.25 mm2 connecting cables,
metal, degree of protection IP67,
3SY3 134
1 unit
102
0.025
Cable boxes (8-pole), M12

With 5 m PUR cable, 8 0.25 mm2, IP67
3RX8 000-0CB811GF0
1 unit
574
0.335
metal M16 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT
3SX1997
1 unit
0.022
Adaptors for 3SE. (with M 16)
3SX1997
Adaptors for 3SE2 (with M 20)

3SX9918
3SX1998
plastic M20 x 1.5 wire gland
3SB3901-0CK
1 unit
0.011
metal M20 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT
3SX1998
1 unit
0.022
plastic M20 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT
3SX9918
1 unit
0.012
plastic cable gland, M20 x 1.5
3SX9926
1 unit
0.010
metal M 25 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT
3SX1999
1 unit
0.022
3SX9918
3SX9926
Adaptors for 3SE. (with M 25)
3SX1999
1)
For wiring, a crimping tool is necessary,

max. conductor cross-section 1 mm2.
13/42


3SE5, Open-type design
Overview
Their compact design makes these switches particularly suitable for use in confined conditions. The fixing dimensions and
operating points are according to EN 50047.
The switches are equipped with two or three contacts in slowaction or snap-action versions. The stroke is 6 mm.

2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP20 (2 contacts), IP10 (3 contacts)
Version
Contacts
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PS*
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 30 mm

With teflon plunger, 6 mm
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 250-0BC05
1 unit
102
0.025
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 250-0CC05
1 unit
102
0.025
2 contacts
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 250-0KC05
1 unit
102
0.035
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 250-0LC05
1 unit
102
0.035
Empty enclosures
without contact block
--
3SE5 250-0AC05
1 unit
102
0.015
3 contacts
Empty
enclosures
For operation, operating speed and travel, see pages 13/51.

13/43

3SE3, Open-type design
2 contacts Moving double break contacts Degree of protection: Terminals IP 20, switching chamber IP 40
Tandem arrangement (2 2 contacts) is possible when 3SY3 121 adapter is used (see accessories below).
Internal circuit
diagram
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
Nominal travel and related terminals

0-line
Term. design.
acc. to
EN 50 013
*
**
Preferred type
1 unit
kg
commencement of plunger travel

contact closed
contact open
positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Minimum
force
required
along
plunger
axis
along plunger axis perpend. to plunger axis = 30
Snap-action contacts, 6 mm stroke

3SE3 020-1A
with 21 mm long plunger, 6mm Hub

3SE3 020-1A
0.036
6N
Slow-action contacts, 6 mm stroke

3SE3 020-0A
with 21 mm long plunger, 6mm Hub

3SE3 020-0A
0.036
8N
Coupling
3SY3 121
Coupling
for tandem arrangement of 2-pole opentype position switches
3SY3 121
0.001
3 contacts Moving double break contacts Degree of protection: Terminals IP 20, switching chamber IP 40
Slow-action contacts, 6 mm stroke

3SE3 023-0A
with 21 mm plunger and repeat plunger,

for tandem arrangement, 6mm Hub
3SE3 023-1A
13 N
0.051
Slow-action make-before-break contacts, 6 mm stroke

3SE3 023-2A
with 21 mm plunger and repeat plunger,

for tandem arrangement, 6mm Hub
11 N
3SE3 023-2A
0.051
3SE3 023-3A
0.058
13 N

Safety function according to IEC 60 947-5-1
13/44

Configuration
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
13
21
Ident. No. 11
13 31 21
Ident. No. 12
3SE5 1..-.BC02
3SE5 1..-.CC02
mm
mm
3,1
3,5
3,2
3,8

3SE5 1..-.BF01
16,8
16,2
vmax = 2.5 m/s
19,2
21-22
13-14
NSC0_00885
mm
5,5
5,5
20,2
19,8
15,5
30
3,2
mm
3SE5 1..-.LF01
14,5
14,0
13,0
mm
NSC0_00864a
40
3
R3
2,2
3SE5 1..-.KA00 + head1) 3SE5 1..-.CF01
NSC0_00861a
22
NSC0_00862a
50,5
0,8
3,0
5,5
3SE5 112-..F0.
mm
1,9
15,8
15,2
14,2
*
13-14
21-22
5,5
NSC0_00863a

3SE5 1..-.LC02
NSC0_00832a
2,6
NSC0_00833a
2,4
vmax = 1.5 m/s
11
1,0
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
mm
NSC0_00875
25,5
NSC0_00831a
10
3SE5 1..-.KC02
13-14
21-22
21-22
13-14

3SE5 1..-..C02
NSC0_00768
21
13
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
14 32 22
NSC0_00834a
Contact closed
Contact open
1 NO + 1 NC
22
14
13-14
31-32
21-22
vmax
1 NO + 2 NC
22 32 14
mm
*
13-14
31-32
21-22
1 NO + 1 NC
22
14
NSC0_00767
NSC0_00770

(snap-action)
NSC0_00769

vmax
Roller plungers, type C
38,5
30
21
NSC0_00880
22
vmax = 1 m/s
14
13
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00845a
mm
3,8 4,4 5,0
13
3SE5 1..-.CD02
22
21
0
mm
NSC0_00846a
*
3,3
13-14
21-22
4,1
5,0
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 1..-.KD02
0
22 32 14
21 31 13
14
21-22
13-14
Ident. No. 11

Ident. No. 12
1)
Lateral actuation
3SE5 1..-.BD02
NSC0_00769
13
Contact closed
Contact open
Lateral actuation
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00770
3SE5 1..-..D02
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00767

(snap-action)
1 NO + 2 NC
NSC0_00847a
21-22
31-32
13-14
mm
5,4 6,0 6,8
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00768
3SE5 1..-.LD02
0
*
mm
NSC0_00848a
13-14
31-32
21-22
3,8 4,4 4,8
Ident. No. 12

13/45

Configuration
(snap-action)
Roller levers
Lateral actuation
14
11
21
13
1 NO + 2 NC
NSC0_00887
10,2 10,8 11,2
13
1 NO + 2 NC
NSC0_00855a
21-22
31-32
13-14
mm
11,1 11,9 12,4
14
13
NSC0_00869a
30 32 34
21-22
13-14
90
3SE5 1..-.KH01
13
NSC0_00869a
NSC0_00770
30 32 34
21-22
13-14
90
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 1..-.KA00 + head2)
NSC0_00871a
0
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
NSC0_00889
13-14
31-32
21-22
9,1 9,7 10,6
14
13
22
21
NSC0_00870a
*
20
32
40
13-14
21-22
90
3SE5 1..-.LH01
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00872a
20
32
40
13-14
31-32
21-22
90
14
13
3SE5 1..-.CH60
22
21
NSC0_00870a
*
20
32
40
13-14
21-22
90
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
21 31 13
mm
NSC0_00856a
1 NO + 1 NC
0
NSC0_00769
21
44 ... 114
30 32 34
21-22
31-32
13-14
90
3SE5 1..-.BH60
14
30
3SE5 1..-.CH01
22
13-14
21-22
8,1 8,7 9,4
Ident. No. 12
1 NO + 1 NC
19
NSC0_00871a
Ident. No. 12

3SE5 1..-..H6.
13 31 21
1 NO + 2 NC
22 32 14
21 31 13
mm
NSC0_00854a
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 1..-.LE01
14 32 22
1 NO + 1 NC
0
NSC0_00769
21
3SE5 1..-.BH01
Ident. No. 11
vmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
21
22
49,5
30
22
Ident. No. 12
1 NO + 1 NC
19
mm
3SE5 1..-.KE01
22 32 14
21 31 13
Ident. No. 12
14
21-22
13-14
Ident. No. 11
Twist levers1), type A

3SE5 1..-..H0.
NSC0_00853a
Ident. No. 11
vmax = 2.5 m/s

3SE5 1..-.CE01
NSC0_00767
30
NSC0_00883
41
0
R2
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00768
22
NSC0_00769
22
0
19,8
Lateral actuation
3SE5 1..-.BE01
NSC0_00767
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00770
3SE5 1..-..E0.
NSC0_00768
vmax
Contact closed
Contact open
NSC0_00767
Contact closed
Contact open
30 32 34
21-22
31-32
13-14
90
Ident. No. 12
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 1..-.LH60
0
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00768
20
32
NSC0_00872a
40
13-14
31-32
21-22
90
Ident. No. 12
vmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
Fork levers1)

1 NO + 1 NC
13/46
21
NSC0_00916
60
13-14
21-22
90
3SE5 1..-.LA00 + head2)
1 NO + 2 NC
14 32 22
vmax = 1.5 m/s

Minimum torque
1)
3SE5 1..-.CT11
22
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00905
14
13
49,5
30
The fork levers can be used only with snap-action

contacts.
13 31 21
NSC0_00768
19
NSC0_00767
3SE5 1..-..T1.
NSC0_00917
55 60
13-14
21-22
31-32
90
Ident. No. 12
2)


Operating point acc. to EN 50041/47

(snap-action)
vma

1 NO + 1 NC
19
22
14
21
13
44 ... 114
30
3SE5 1..-.BH50
NSC0_00769
3SE5 1..-..H5.
NSC0_00912
30 32
21-22
13-14
90
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 1..-.KA00 + head2)
NSC0_00914
0
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
NSC0_00928
14
22
13
21
3SE5 1..-.CH50, -.CH51
NSC0_00913
32
20
13-14
21-22
90
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
21 31 13

1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00767
Contact closed
Contact open
30 32
21-22
31-32
13-14
90
Ident. No. 12
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 1..-.LH50
0
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00768
Contact closed
Contact open
32
20
NSC0_00915
13-14
31-32
21-22
90
Ident. No. 12
0
vmax = 1.5 m/s
Minimum torque
Rod actuators1), type D
113 ... 203
13
NSC0_00912
30 32
21-22
13-14
90
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 1..-.KA00 + head2)
NSC0_00914
0
NSC0_00890
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
21 31 13
13
3SE5 1..-.CH80, -.CH82
22
21
NSC0_00913
32
20
13-14
21-22
90
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 2 NC
11
14
NSC0_00767
21
14

1 NO + 1 NC
30 32
21-22
31-32
13-14
90
Ident. No. 12
3SE5 1..-.LA00 + head2)
1 NO + 2 NC
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00768
22
3SE5 1..-.BA00 + head2)
1 NO + 1 NC
NSC0_00769
3SE5 1..-..H8.
NSC0_00915
32
20
13-14
31-32
21-22
90
Ident. No. 12
0
vmax = 1.5 m/s
Minimum torque
Spring rods

1 NO + 1 NC
7
75,8
13
21
3SE5 1..-.CR01
NSC0_00873a
13-14
21-22
7
15
242,3
142,3
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00891
3SE5 1..-.LA00 + head2)

NSC0_00874a
0
1 NO + 2 NC
13-14
31-32
21-22
7
15
Ident. No. 12
1)
2)

22
Ident. No. 11
0
vmax = 1 m/s
14
NSC0_00768
The spring rods can be used only with snap-action

contacts.
NSC0_00767
3SE5 1..-..R0.
13/47

5,3
0
16,3
0
16,3
40,5
14
M20x1,5
M12x1
M20x1,5
15,3
37,3
NSC0_00804a
NSC0_00803a
60
78
60
78
30
NSC0_00753a
60
78
2
15,3
37,3
M20x1,5
16,3
30
30
30
40,5
40,5
M26x1,5
30
26
5,3
7,7
12,5

with 6-pole connector socket
3SE5 115
5,3

with M12 connector socket
3SE5 114
7,7
12,5
7,7
12,5

3SE5 112
15,3
37,3
13,5
7,7

3SE5 122
5,4
0
6
16,3
78
40
20
NSC0_00754
M20x1,5
56
13/48
5,5
15,3
37,8


Operating mechanisms for enclosure width 40 mm and 56 mm
Rounded plunger, type B acc. to EN 50041
Roller plunger, type C acc. to EN 50041
19,8
12
0
23
11
Twist lever, type A acc. to EN 50041
22
24
Twist lever, rubber roller 50 mm

50
40
23,65
7,2
44,4
24
24
13
27
0
NSC0_00766a
24
24
13
24
NSC0_00825a
27
27
44,4
41
27
0
23,65
24
7,2
24
39
50
7,2
13
24
23,65
13
NSC0_00820a
24
13
7,2
39
30
NSC0_00760a
23
49,5
40
NSC0_00758
12,5
12
50,5
23
52,4
47
39
23,65
19
23,65
Twist lever, 2 rollers 19 mm
43
39
19
3
R3
NSC0_00765a
NSC0_00757
R2
28,5
38,5
23
11
22
NSC0_00756
15,5
25,5
NSC0_00755
Roller lever
13
10
8,6
46,4
45
39
19
24

24
13
49,5
23,65
NSC0_00761a
Fork lever
7,2
41
13/49

3SE5, metal and plastic enclosures
Enclosure widths 31 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 56 mm
Operating mechanisms for 31 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm, 56 mm
roller 19 mm

with grid hole, roller 19 mm
19

roller 30 mm
19
7,2
30
7,2
7,2
24
24
12
Spring rod, length 142.5 mm
24
150
242,3
42,3
NSC0_00791
NSC0_00759
24
42,3
24
13
NSC0_00763
114,5
50
33,5
28,5
11
Spring rod, length 242.5 mm
50
142,3
113 ... 203

200
33
39
12
50
25,65
24
12
R od a c tu a t o r
13
8,6
124,5
16
NSC0_00827
33
39
124,5
25,65
24
13
124,5
NSC0_00826a
24
0
16
50
8,6
75 ... 129
75 ... 129
25,65
32
37

with grid hole, rubber roller 50 mm
50
7,2
13
NSC0_00793a
16
24
24
12

rubber roller 50 mm
50
24
12

roller 50 mm
32
37
13
NSC0_00819a
109
NSC0_00764a
44 ... 114
0
25,65
24
12
16
76 ... 129,5
24
32
37
25,65
24
109
21,5
29,8
38
45,3
53
60,7
68,4
76,1
83,8
91,5
13
13
NSC0_00762a
16
16
24
44 ... 114
32
37
25,65
55 ... 119
24
NSC0_00790
42,3
75,8
23,5
10
24
13/50


3SE3 / 3SE5
Open-type design
Configuration
1 NO + 1 NC
22
14
1 NO + 1 NC
22
14
vmax

(snap-action)
EN 60947-5-1
0-line
Commencement of plunger travel

Ident. No. 11
21 31 13
13
Ident. No. 12
21
13 31 21
Ident. No. 11
NSC0_00768
13
1 NO + 2 NC
14 32 22
NSC0_00767
21
NSC0_00770
*
**
1 NO + 2 NC
22 32 14
NSC0_00769
Ident. No. 12
Contact closed
Contact open
-0CC05
3,1
3,5
3,2
3,8
5,5
1,9
5,5
1,5
1,0
1,3
3,0
3,0
5,5
Short stroke
1)
mm
mm
0,8
2,2
3,0
5,5
mm
0,5
3,2
5,5
5,5
NSC0_00834a

2,6
-0LC05
NSC0_00836a
vmax = 0.5 m/s
2,4
NSC0_00833a
NSC0_00904
1,0
NSC0_00835a
mm
-0AC051)
13-14
21-22
NSC0_00832a
mm
-0AC051)
13-14
21-22
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
13-14
mm
NSC0_00831a
-0KC05
13-14
31-32
21-22
-0BC05
13-14
21-22
10,7
Rounded plungers
3SE5 250-0. C05
The empty enclosure and contact block must be ordered separately.
3SE3 020-.A
22
20
10
5
5
21
10
26
intermediate
piece
NSC0_00357b
95,2
81
21
NSC0_00356a
5,3x4,3
67,6
NSC0_00894
27
59,5
48,5
10
4
10
30
3SE3 023-.A
30,2
22
20
38,5
59,2
20,7
10,7
3SE5 250
3SY3 121
30,2
Repeat plunger

26
13/51

Configuration
Operation, actuating speed and travel or angle of actuators
Actuating speed in the direction of the plunger axis
Bars, cams, stops, etc. are used as actuators.The shape of the

actuator must provide the given angles for the leading and trailing edges.
The actuating speed in the case of position switches with slowaction contacts is not permitted to go lower than 15 mm/s for DC
and 1 mm/s for AC. Position switches with snap-action contacts
should be used when the actuating speeds are lower.
Position switches with 2 or 4 contacts

0-line
S
H
*
**
vmax

Travel difference
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
Contact closed
Contact open
Return travel of the NO contact
(snap action)
3SE3 0000A
3SE3 0100A
Plungers
1 NO + 2 NC
2 NC
2 NO
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
Ident. No. 12
Ident. No. 02
Ident. No. 20
Ident. No. 11
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 0003A
3SE3 0103A
3SE3 0006A
3SE3 0007A
3SE3 0001A
3SE3 0101A
3SE3 000
8AV00
3SE3 010
8AV00
NSC00014
17 25
18 26
3SE2 100.B, 3SE 1 0.B,

3SE2 404.B
3SE2 1.0-3B
3SE2 1.0-7B
vmax = 1.5 m/s

With makebefore-break


3SE2 100.C, 3SE 1 0.C,
3SE2 230.C, 3SE2 404.C

3SE2 230-0C
vmax = 1.5 m/s
vmax = 2.5 m/s

in direction of operation: 12N
13/52

3SE2 230-6C
3SE2 1.0-7C,
3SE2 230-7C
3SE2 230-6F
3SE2 1.0-7F,
3SE2 230-7F
3SE2 230-1C
3SE2 230-8C

3SE2 100.F, 3SE 1 0.F,
3SE2 230.F, 3SE2 404.F
3SE2 1.0-3C,
3SE2 230-3C

3SE2 230-0F
3SE2 1.0-3F,
3SE2 230-3F

3SE2 230-1F
3SE2 230-8F


Position switches with 2 or 4 contacts
vmax
0-line
H
Operating point acc. to

EN 50041
Reference line acc. to
EN 50041
Travel difference
Contact blocks
acc. to EN 50013
0-line
S
*
**
Roller plungers, type C

3SE2 100.D,
3SE 1 0.D,
3SE2 230.D,
3SE2 404.D
Contact blocks
Nominal travel
Reference line acc. to

EN 50041
Operating travel acc. to
EN 50041
Contact closed
Contact open
Return travel
Operating point on return
IEC 60947-5-1
Lateral actuation
Lateral actuation
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 230-0D
3SE3 0000A,
3SE3 0100A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
3SE2 230-6D
3SE3 0006A,
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 1.0-3D,
3SE2 230-3D
2 NO
3SE2 1.0-7D,
3SE2 230-7D
NSC00014
17 25
18 26
vmax = 1 m/s (3SE2 2301D),

vmax = 0.5 m/s (3SE 1 0.D),
3SE3 0007A,
Ident. No. 20
3SE3 0003A,
3SE3 0103A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 230-1D
3SE3 0001A,
3SE3 0101A,
Ident. No. 11
Roller levers
3SE2 100.E, 3SE 1 0.E,
3SE2 230.E, 3SE2 404.E
2 NC
3SE2 230-8DV00
3SE3 0008AV00,
3SE3 0108AV00,
Ident. No. 02
Lateral actuation
Lateral actuation
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 230-0E
3SE3 0000A,
3SE3 0100A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
3SE2 230-6E
3SE3 0006A,
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 1.0-3E,
3SE2 230-3E
2 NO
3SE2 1.0-7E,
3SE2 230-7E

NSC00014
17 25
vmax = 2.5 m/s
18 26
3SE3 0007A,
Ident. No. 20
3SE3 0003A,
3SE3 0103A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE3 0001A,
3SE3 0101A,
Ident. No. 11

3SE2 230-1E
2 NC
3SE2 230-8EV00
3SE3 0008AV00,
3SE3 0108AV00,
Ident. No. 02
13/53

Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 or 4 contacts Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar
Switch blocks
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041 Terminal designation

approach angle
acc. to EN 50 013
trailing angle
travel difference
vmax
0-line
S
H
Roller crank, type A

repositionable and
Nominal travel
0-line
S
*
**
Switch blocks
Nominal travel
ref. line acc. to EN 50 041

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE2 230-0GW
2 NC
3SE2 230-6GW
3SE2 100.GW, 3SE. 1@0.GW,

3SE2 230.GW, 3SE2 404.GW
3SE3 0000A,
3SE3 0100A,
Ident. No. 11
3SE3 0006A,
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE 1 0-3GW
With make-bef.-break 3SE2 230-3GW
2 NO
3SE 1 0-7GW
3SE2 230-7GW
NSC00014
17 25
18 26
Standard
vmax. = 3 m/s
Minimum torque required
in direction of operation: 25 Ncm
3SE3 0007A,
Ident. No. 20
3SE3 0003A,
3SE3 0103A,
Ident. No. 11
Snap-action contacts 3SE2 230-1GW
3SE2 230-8GW00
1 NC + 1 NO
2 NC
3SE3 0001A,
3SE3 0101A,
Ident. No. 11
3SE3 0001AV00,
3SE3 0101AV00,
Ident. No. 02
In special designs, contacts can only be

operated from right or left. By twisting the
plunger from the right and left.
3SE2 100.UW, 3SE. 1@0.UW,

3SE2 230.U, 3SE2 404.UW
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE2 230-0U

2 NC
3SE3 0000A,
3SE3 0100A,
Ident. No. 11
3SE3 0006A,
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC
With make-bef.-break 3SE 1 0-3UW
2 NO
3SE2 230-6U
3SE 1 0-7UW
3SE2 230-7U
NSC00014
17 25
18 26
Standard
vmax. = 1 m/s, max = 30, max = 30

3SE3 0007A,
Ident. No. 20
3SE3 0003A,
3SE3 0103A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE2 230-1U
2 NC
3SE2 230-8UW00
Contact operation either from right or left

or from right and left.
3SE3 0001A,
3SE3 0101A,
Ident. No. 11
3SE3 0001AV00,
3SE3 0101AV00,
Ident. No. 02
1) Max. operating angle 70.
13/54


2 or 4 contacts Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar
vmax
0-line
Switch blocks
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041 Terminal designation

acc. to EN 50 013
Rod actuator
Nominal travel
0-line
*
**
Switch blocks

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
in direction of rotation
3SE2 100.WW, 3SE. 1@0.WW,

3SE2 230.W, 3SE2 404.WW
1 NC + 1 NO
Nominal travel
3SE2 230-0V, 3SE2 230-0W
in direction of rotation
2 NC
3SE2 230-6V, 3SE2 230-6W
3SE2 100.VW, 3SE. 1@0.VW,

3SE2 230.V, 3SE2 404.VW
3SE3 0000A,
3SE3 0100A,
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE3 0006A,
Ident. No. 02
2 NO
3SE 1 0-3WW
3SE 1 0-7WW
3SE2 230-7V, 3SE2 230-7W
NSC00014
17 25
3SE3 0007A,
Ident. No. 20
18 26
3SE3 0003A,
3SE3 0103A,
Ident. No. 11
Standard
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE2 230-1V, 3SE2 230-1W
2 NC
3SE2 230-8VW00,
3SE2 230-8WW00
vmax. = 3 m/s
In special designs, contacts can only be 3SE3 0001A,
operated from right or left. By twisting the 3SE3 0101A,
plunger from the right and left.
Ident. No. 11
Spring rod
3SE2 1001R, 3SE. 1@01R,
3SE2 230.R
3SE3 0001AV00,
3SE3 0101AV00,
Ident. No. 02
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 0001A,
3SE3 0101A,
Ident. No. 11
3SE2 230-1R
2 NC
3SE2 230-8RV00
3SE3 0001AV00,
3SE3 0101AV00,
Ident. No. 02
Standard
vmax. = 1 m/s, approachable from all

sides
with lateral deflection at the tip: 2.5 N

13/55

3 contacts Wide enclosure
Operation by a bar
vmax
0-line
H
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041

travel difference
Plunger
3SE2 303.B
Switch blocks
Nominal travel
Terminal designation acc.

to EN 50 013
0-line
S
*
**

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
along plunger axis
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 303-1B
Minimum force
required in
direction of
operation

18 N
Ident. No. 21
vmax. = 1.5 m/s

1 NO + 2 NC
make-before-break
16 N
3SE2 303-2B
Ident. No. 12
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
2 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break
18 N
3SE2 303-3B
Ident. No. 21
13/56


Operation by a bar
vmax
0-line
H

travel difference
Overtravel plunger
3SE2 303.C
Switch blocks
Nominal travel

to EN 50 013
0-line
S
*
**

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
along plunger axis
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 303-1C
Minimum force
required in
direction of
operation

37 N
Ident. No. 21
vmax. = 1.5 m/s

1 NO + 2 NC
make-before-break
35 N
3SE2 303-2C
Ident. No. 12
vmax. = 0.5 m/s

2 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break
37 N
3SE2 303-3C
Ident. No. 21

13/57

Operation by a bar
vmax
0-line
H

travel difference
Roller plunger
3SE2 303.D
Switch blocks
Nominal travel

to EN 50 013
0-line
S
*
**

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
along plunger axis
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 303-1D
Minimum force
required in
direction of
operation

37 N
Ident. No. 21
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
1 NO + 2 NC
make-before-break
35 N
3SE2 303-2D
Ident. No. 12
vmax. = 1 m/s
2 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break
37 N
3SE2 303-3D
Ident. No. 21
13/58


Operation by a bar
vmax
0-line
H

approach angle
trailing angle
approach angle
travel difference
Roller lever
3SE2 303.E
Switch blocks
Nominal travel

to EN 50 013
0-line
S
**

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Minimum force
required in
direction of
operation
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 303-1E
17 N
3SE2 303-2E
15 N
3SE2 303-3E
17 N
along plunger axis

3SE2 303-1F
17 N
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
make-before-break
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break
Ident. No. 21
For operation perpendicular to plunger axis

:vmax. = 1 m/s at max = 30
vmax. = 2.5 m/s at max = 45
max = 45
For operation along plunger axis: vmax. = 1.5 m/s

3SE2 303.F
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
make-before-break
15 N
3SE2 303-2F
3SE2 303-3F
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break
For operation along plunger axis:

vmax. = 1 m/s at max = 30

17 N
Ident. No. 21
13/59

Operation by a bar
vmax
0-line
H

travel difference
Roller crank
Switch blocks
Nominal travel

to EN 50 013
0-line
S
**

contact closed
contact open
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 303-1GW
Minimum force
required in
direction of
rotation
25 Ncm
3SE2 303.GWZ
Z=A31
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
make-before-break
vmax. = 3 m/s
3SE2 303-2GW
Ident. No. 12
In special designs contacts can only be operated

from right or left. By twisting the plunger from
the right and left.
2 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break
3SE2 303-3GW
Ident. No. 21

Max. deflection for adjustment
purposes 90.
13/60


Position switches with 3 contacts
Contact blocks
vmax
0-line

to EN 50013
0-line
S
Approach angle
Trailing angle
**

Contact closed
Contact open
Positive opening q acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Minimum torque
in direction of
rotation
3SE2 303.UW
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 3030UW
25 Ncm
3SE2 3031UW
25 Ncm
3SE2 3032UW
25 Ncm
3SE2 3033UW
25 Ncm
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
with make-before-break
vmax = 3 m/s,
max = 30,
max = 30
Contact operation is possible from either right or
left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left. Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
Rod actuators
3SE2 303.VW, 3SE2 303.WW
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 3030VW, 3SE2 3030WW
25 Ncm
3SE2 3031VW, 3SE2 3031WW
25 Ncm
3SE2 3032VW, 3SE2 3032WW
25 Ncm
3SE2 3033VW, 3SE2 3033WW
25 Ncm
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NC
vmax = 3 m/s
Contact operation is possible from either right or
left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left. Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1)
Max. operating angle 70.

Max. deflection for adjustment purposes 90.

13/61

18
56
39
6,5
12,5
20
23
39
Rounded plunger, type B
13
39
33
43
20
30,5
4
18
56
Roller plunger, type C
10
16
7,5
97
NSC0_00337b
7,5
20
23
15
3SE2 404
wide enclosure, 4 contacts
42
40
9,3x5,3
67,5
NSC0_00336a
7,3x5,3
16
9,3 x 5,3
6,5
6,5
75
60
5,3
30
40
40
16
17,5
17,5
NSC0_00341b
40
6,5
4
16
3SE2 303
wide enclosure, 3 contacts
3SE2 100
wide enclosure, 2 contacts,
with plunger
11,5
11,5
3SE 1 0
narrow enclosure, 2 contacts,
with plunger
7,5
NSC0_00348b
Roller lever
46,5
18
5,3
39
21,5
49 *)
27
18
40
56
44
40*)
30
4,3
24
22
NSC0_00342b
18
19
19
NSC0_00331b
NSC0_00330b

Twist lever, type A
30
55,5
19
15,5
7
56
30
30
55
16
26
Fork lever
54
47
19
22
110
127,5
NSC0_00347
60
63
NSC0_00493b
NSC0_00352b
Rod actuator, adjustable length, type D
59,5
Spring rod
10
200
26
108
16
NSC0_00333b
53
63
138,5
10,5
16
26
21,5...91,5
50
19
52
NSC0_00334b
NSC 00335a
13/62


Compact design with molded cable
Overview
In harsh industrial environments
and in installations with limited
space, the small 3SE3 160 and
3SE3 180 compact switches are
ideal. The switches are already
equipped with a molded cable of
2 m in length and can therefore
be installed in the smallest
spaces.
Both the housing and the actuator head are made of metal and
therefore meet the high IP 67 degree of protection. Various actuator heads, in the form of roller
plungers, overtravel plungers
and roller cranks, are available.
They can be fitted alternatively

with snap-action contacts.
1 NO + 1 NC. The NC contact
complies with the requirements
for positive opening according
to IEC 60 947-5-1.
The 3SE3 1 position switch with
molded cable is available in different sizes:
The 3SE3 180 series complies

with the EU standard and features a 30 mm wide enclosure
with drilled holes at a spacing
of 20 mm.
The 3SE3 160 series meets the
requirements of the US market
and features a 40 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a
spacing of 25 mm.
Technical data
Switching frequency
30/min
Degree of protection
IP 67
500 V
Contact opening
2 x 1.25 mm
Pollution degree
Class 3
Operating speed
up to 80% operating distance
10 A
3SE3 1.0-.C.
1 m/s
Ambient temperature
30 to +85 C
3SE3 1.0-.D.
Vertical 1 m/s
10 106 operations
500 000 operations
3SE3 1.0-.G.
1.5 m/s
Connecting cable (2 m)
PVC-5 x 0.75 mm (18 AWG);

br-bl: S, bk-bk: NC, ye/gy: 0 V
Rated operational voltage
500 VAC; over 380 VAC only with

equal potential
Lateral 0.5 m/s

2 contacts Degree of protection IP 67
.
Actuator
Weight
Approx.
3SE3 1 position switches

3SE3 180-1C
6 mm stroke
Enclos.
width
Ident. No. 11
acc. to EN 50 013
Order No.
3SE3 180-1D
List Price $
mm
Overtravel plunger
with M 12 thread fixing
3SE3 160-1G
Roller plunger
with M 12 thread fixing
Roller crank
1 unit
kg
30
3SE3 180-1C
0.316
40
3SE3 160-1C
0.332
30
3SE3 180-1CJ
0.335
40
3SE3 160-1CJ
0.351
30
3SE3 180-1D
0.323
40
3SE3 160-1D
0.348
30
3SE3 180-1DJ
0.334
40
3SE3 160-1DJ
0.364
30
3SE3 180-1G
0.366
40
3SE3 160-1G
0.395
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
Switch blocks and travel

Switch block
Nominal travel
Internal circuit diagram
0-line
contact closed
acc. to EN 50 013
**
positive opening to
IEC 60 947-5-1-3
contact open
3SE3 1.01C., 1D.

2,5 4 **
BN BK
BU GY
NSC0_00264b

3S E 3 1 . 0 1 G
5 mm 100%
BK-GY
BN-BU
BK-GY
BN-BU
GY
1,5
NSC0_00265d
30
60 ** 75 100%
BK-GY
BN-BU
BK-GY
BN-BU
BN = brown
BU = blue
20
BK = black
NSC0_00266d
GN/YE = green/yellow
13/63

Compact design with molded cable
Dimension drawings
3SE3 180-.C
3SE3 160-.C
3SE3 180-.CJ
3SE3 160-.CJ
3SE3 180-.D
3SE3 160-.D
3SE3 180-.DJ
3SE3 160-.DJ
3SE3 180-.G
3SE3 160-.G
All devices with 2 m cable
13/64

3SE03 North American Limit Switches
General Information
Features
Modular plug-in
Features
UL Listed, CSA Certified.
UL File: E47512
All Metal Captive Screws.
Keyed, Four-Directional Head.
Steel-Reinforced Diaphragm
Seal Between Operational
Head And Switch Body.
Permanent Instructions for
Adjusting Operational Head.
Modular, Plug-In Housing
1.Heavy-Duty, Bifurcated,
Plug-In Prongs.
2.Ample Receptacle Wiring
Space with 1/2 - NPT
threaded conduit opening.
3.Stepped Terminals On
Single Pole; Deep Center
Trough On Double Pole.
NEMA Type 6P Submersible
1.Completely Sealed With
Epoxy.
2.SOOW-A Cable or Prewired
Receptacle With Pin
Connector.
3.Factory wired cable features
a 350 pound pullput
capacity.
Rotary heads are field
convertible CW, CCW, or both
without special tools.
Prewired receptacle
with pin connector
Design
Modular Plug-In Housing
These heavy duty plug-in limit
switches may be provided as
complete devices using a
composite catalog number; or,
separately as components;
operating head, plug-in module
and base receptacle.
Example:
Complete Switch:
3SE03-AR1
Single Pole, Double Throw
contacts with Side Rotary,
Momentary Head
Components
3SE03-SA
Single Pole, Double Throw
Plug-in Module
3SE03-DR1
Side Rotary Head,
Momentary
3SE03-RA
Standard, Single Pole
Receptacle, 1 NO + 1 NC
Since components may be
interchanged, operating heads,
plug-in modules and
receptacles may be combined
to satisfy most of your everyday
limit switch requirements. This
leads to less inventory with
greater flexibility.
Operating heads include side
rotary; plain and roller plunger;
and, wobble. A variety of levers
are available.
The zinc die-cast housing has an
epoxy finish to protect against
corrosion. All screws on the
module and head are captive.
Prewired cable
NEMA Type 6P Submersible

These heavy duty prewired,
factory sealed switches meet the
demanding enclosure
requirements of UL (NEMA) Type
3, 4, 4X, 6P, 12, and 13. They are
intended for wet environments
where the integrity of the
threaded conduit and switch
body seals must be assured.
The switch body cavity including
threaded conduit entry is
completely sealed with epoxy.
An 8 foot, 5 or 9 conductor
SOOW-A cable; or 5 or 9 pin
prewired receptacle with pin
connector is provided as
standard.
Switches are provided as
complete devices using
composite catalog numbers; or,
separately as components;
operating head and switch body.
UL (NEMA) Type 6P switches are
designed to provide a degree of
protection against the entry of
water during prolonged
submersion at limited depths
(tested with a 6 foot head of
water for 24 hours).
Both the Modular Plug-in and the
(NEMA) Type 6P Submersible
styles provide 60 Amp make and
6 Amp break120V AC and 10
Amp continuous current for 120,
240, 480 and 600V AC. The
circuit contact configuration
depends on the device selected
and the application criteria.
Switches are available with
momentary or maintained
operating heads; and, single
pole, double pole or center
neutral (modular, plug-in only)
contact configurations.
3SE03 limit switches offer a new
standard of reliability and quality
in automatic control circuits
under heavy duty applications.
Plug-in module and

receptacle are keyed.

13/65
Specifications
Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible

Technical data
Type
Modular, Plug-in and NEMA Type 6P Submersible
Mechanical life
Side rotary: 13 x 106 make-break operations minimum

All others: 10 x 106 make-break operations minimum
Single Pole: 1 x 106 operations typical at full load
Double Pole: 1 x 105 operations typical at full load
Electrical life
8 x 103 make-break operations per hour (maximum)

Side operated: 0.0012 in. (modular, plug-in housing)
Side rotary: 0.0014 in. (modular plug-in). Top operated: 0.0003 in. (modular, plug-in housing)
1/2 in.-NPT, Prewired Cable or Prewired Receptacle with Pin Connector
Switching frequency
Operating point accuracy
Cable entry
Without Cable: 10 to +121C, 14 to 250F

With Cable: 10 to +105C, 14 to 221F
NEMA Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 13; IP67
Ambient temperature
2212 AWG (modular, plug-in housing), single or stranded wire

5 or 9 conductor, 16 AWG yellow jacketed type SOOW-A cable (prewired cable)
5 or 9 pin, 0.87 in. (22 mm) diameter receptacle (prewired receptacle with pin connector)
Any position
Switch body screws: 2530 lb-in.
Operating head screws: 1418 lb-in.
Conductor size
Mounting
Tightening Torque
DC,
NEMA R300
NEMA rating
AC,
NEMA A600
Maximum current at
125V
250V
120V
240V
480V
600V
Make
Break
0.22A
0.22A
0.11A
0.11A
60A
6A
30A
3A
15A
1.5A
12A
1.2A
Max. volt-ampere
Make
Break
28VA
28VA
28VA
28VA
7200VA
720VA
7200VA
720VA
7200VA
720VA
7200VA
720VA
Rated thermal current

Rated operating voltage
DC, 1A
DC, 300V
AC, 10A
AC, 600V
Operating temperature 1) 2)
Operation
Temperature rating
Temperature range
Type
Return
Momentary CW only
1
Side rotary )
or CCW only
Momentary CW or CCW
Center neutral
Maintained
Side rotary
2
Momentary
Side plunger
Maintained
Two-sided plunger
Momentary
Roller side plunger4)
Momentary
Top plunger
3
Momentary
Top roller plunger4)
Wobble head
Momentary
1) Temperature ranges below
3) For CW only or CCW only
operation, upper temperature
+32F (0C) are based on
limit increases to 250F
absence of freezing moisture
(121C) without cable, and
or water.
221F (105C) with pre-wired
2) For temperature rating of
cable.
specific switch, refer to page
4) Roller direction can be
13/70, Operating Heads.
converted in the field.
3
13/66
Without cable
With cable
10F to 200F
-12C to 94C
10F to 200F
-12C to 94C
14F to 200F
-10C to 94C
14F to 200F
-10C to 94C
14F to 250F
-10C to 121C
14F to 221F
-10C to 105C

Selection
Modular, plug-in metal housing

Complete switches without lever - threaded cable entry:
Plug-In module type
Standard single pole

1 NO + 1 NC
(3SE03-SA)
Standard double pole

2 NO + 2 NC
(3SE03-SB)
Single pole
(3SE03-RA)
Double pole
(3SE03-RB)
Receptacle type
surface mount
Composite catalog number consisting of head, module and

receptacle
List Price $
List Price $
Catalog Number
Catalog Number 1 unit
1 unit
Operating head type

Standard momentary
(3SE03-DR1)
3SE03-AR1
3SE03-BR1
Standard maintained
(3SE03-DM1)
3SE03-AM1
3SE03-BM1
Low torqued momentary

(3SE03-DL1)
3SE03-AL1
3SE03-BL1
Momentary
(3SE03-DS1)
3SE03-AS1
3SE03-BS1
Plain side plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DS3)
3SE03-AS3
3SE03-BS3
Roller side plunger
Maintained
(3SE03-DH1)
3SE03-AH1
3SE03-BH1
Two-sided plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DT1)
3SE03-AT1
3SE03-BT1
Plain top plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DT3)
3SE03-AT3
3SE03-BT3
Roller top plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DW1)
3SE03-AW1
3SE03-BW1
Wobble head (without lever)
Side rotary
CW and CCW operation
convertible to CW only or CCW
only
Center neutral
Double pole
2 NO + 2 NC
(3SE03-SN)
Plug-In module type
Center neutral
(3SE03-RB)
Receptacle type
surface mount
CW
CCW
Composite catalog number

consisting of head, module and receptacle
Operating head type
Side rotary (momentary)
5 pretravel to operate contacts.

Catalog Number
Center
Neutral
List Price $
1 unit
(3SE03-DN1) 3SE03-NN1
(3SE03-DN2) 3SE03-NN2
15 pretravel to operate contacts.
13/67
Selection
NEMA type 6P submersible, prewired cable

Complete switches without lever - prewired cable:
Switch body typeprewired cable with 8 foot cable
Single pole
1 NO + 1 NC
(3SE03-SA6P)
Double pole
2 NO + 2 NC
(3SE03-SB6P)
Cable color code

1 - White
2 - Black
3 - Red
4 - Orange
5 - Green
Cable color code

1 - White
6 - Pink
2 - Black
7 - Yellow
3 - Red
8 - Blue
4 - Orange
9 - Green
5 - Brown
Composite catalog number consisting of head and switch body

Operating head type
List Price $
Catalog Number
1 unit
Standard momentary
(3SE03-DR1)
3SE03-AR16P
3SE03-BR16P
Standard maintained
(3SE03-DM1)
3SE03-AM16P
3SE03-BM16P

(3SE03-DL1)
3SE03-AL16P
3SE03-BL16P
Momentary
(3SE03-DS1)
3SE03-AS16P
3SE03-BS16P
Plain side plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DS3)
3SE03-AS36P
3SE03-BS36P
Roller side plunger
Maintained
(3SE03-DH1)
3SE03-AH16P
Not available
Two-sided plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DT1)
3SE03-AT16P
3SE03-BT16P
Plain top plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DT3)
3SE03-AT36P
3SE03-BT36P
Roller top plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DW1)
3SE03-AW16P
3SE03-BW16P
Side rotary
only
13/68
Catalog Number
List Price $
1 unit

Selection
NEMA type 6P submersible, prewired receptacle

Complete switches without lever - prewired receptacle with pin connector:
Switch Body Typeprewired receptacle with pin

connector
Single pole
1 NO + 1 NC
(3SE03-SA6PC)
Double pole
2 NO + 2 NC
(3SE03-SB6PC)
Composite catalog number consisting of head and switch body

Operating head type
List Price $
Catalog Number
1 unit
Standard momentary
(3SE03-DR1)
3SE03-AR16PC
3SE03-BR16PC
Standard maintained
(3SE03-DM1)
3SE03-AM16PC
3SE03-BM16PC

(3SE03-DL1)
3SE03-AL16PC
3SE03-BL16PC
Momentary
(3SE03-DS1)
3SE03-AS16PC
3SE03-BS16PC
Plain side plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DS3)
3SE03-AS36PC
3SE03-BS36PC
Roller side plunger
Maintained
(3SE03-DH1)
3SE03-AH16PC
Not available
Two-sided plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DT1)
3SE03-AT16PC
3SE03-BT16PC
Plain top plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DT3)
3SE03-AT36PC
3SE03-BT36PC
Roller top plunger
Momentary
(3SE03-DW1)
3SE03-AW16PC
3SE03-BW16PC
Side rotary
only

Catalog Number
List Price $
1 unit
13/69
Selection
Modular, plug-in and NEMA 6P submersible

Components:
Plug-in module
Receptacle
Plug-in module
List Price $
Standard single pole 1 NO + 1 NC
3SE03-SA
Standard double pole 2 NO + 2 NC
3SE03-SB
Center neutral 2 NO + 2 NC
3SE03-SN
Receptacle for plug-in module
List Price $
Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC (5 terminals)
3SE03-RA
Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC (9 terminals)
3SE03-RB
Switch body_NEMA type 6P submersible:
Switch body
List Price $
Prewired receptacle with pin

connector
List Price $
Prewired cable 8 foot length

Prewired cable
Prewired receptacle
Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC
3SE03-SA6P
3SE03-SB6P
3SE03-SA6PC
3SE03-SB6PC
Operating heads :
Nominal operating data

Total
travel
Minimum Operating
Operating Release return
Catalog
temp
position force
Number
Pretravel force
range
Standard momentary
90
3 lb-in.
4.5 oz-in.
3SE03-DR1
90
15
1.5 lb-in.
2.5 oz-in.
3SE03-DL1
Standard maintained
90
50
3 lb-in.
50
3SE03-DM1
Plain side plunger
Momentary
0.25 in. 0.065 in.
4 lbs
0.03 in.
8 oz.
3SE03-DS1
Roller side plunger
Momentary
0.25 in. 0.065 in.
4 lbs
0.03 in.
8 oz.
3SE03-DS3
Two-sided plunger
Maintained
0.32 in. 0.2 in.
5 lbs
0.13 in.
5 lbs
3SE03-DH1
Plain top plunger
Momentary
0.28 in. 0.04 in.
4 lbs
0.02 in.
8 oz.
3SE03-DT1
Roller top plunger
Momentary
0.28 in. 0.04 in.
4 lbs
0.02 in.
8 oz.
3SE03-DT3
Wobble head
Momentary
15
10
2 lb-in.
2.4 oz-in.
3SE03-DW1
Center neutral
Momentary
90
1.8 lb-in.
2.5 oz-in.
3SE03-DN1
90
15
1.8 lb-in.
2.5 oz-in.
3SE03-DN2
Operating head type
Side rotary
For use with 3SE03-DN1, -DN2 operating heads and

3SE03-RB receptacle only.
For use with modular, Plug-in and NEMA Type 6P.
13/70
Refer to Operating Temperature, Catalog page 13/118

for Temperature Ranges.
Without Operating Levers.
CW and CCW operation. Convertible to CW or CCW operation only.
List
Price $
1 unit
ConvertibleHorizontal to Vertical.
Requires Lever.
For use with 3SE03-SN plug-in module only.

Selection
Modular, plug-in metal housing

Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versionsmost widely used
Description
Length
Roller
mounted on Roller
side of lever material
Max required
Roller
Roller face return torque
diameter width
(oz-in.)
Catalog
Number
1.5 (38)
Front
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.53
3SX03-KL200
Roller crank 1.5 (38)

lever
1.5 (38)
Front
Cast aluminum 0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
1.10
3SX03-KL355
Back
Cast aluminum 0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
1.10
3SX03-KL579
Fork lever
1.5 (38)
Back / back
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31
3SX03-KL204
Adjustable
radius
lever
13.5 (2589) Front
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
1.90
3SX03-KL201
13.5 (2589) Front
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
3.40
3SX03-KL538
Rod lever
9 (229)
Stainless steel
7.00
3SX03-KL220
Adjustable
spring rod
12.125 (308)
Nylon
3.50
3SX03-KL556
Nylatron
0.40
3SX03-KL142
Flexible loop 6 (152)

lever
List
Price $
1 unit
Levers
Rod
Nylon
3SX03-KW2
Coil spring
Coil spring
3SX03-KW4
For plunger
actuated
switches
wobble
actuators
Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions:

Roller
Operator
Length
Type
Diameter
0.87 (22)
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.62
3SX03-KL39
1.37 (35)
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.95
3SX03-KL40
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
1.00 (25)
0.25 (6)
0.92
0.77
0.32
1.50 (38)
Nylatron
Ball bearing
Without roller
3SX03-KL337
3SX03-KL531
3SX03-KL32
Nylatron
Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
1.00 (25)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
0.71
1.45
1.5
1.1
Nylatron
Nylatron
Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
1.5 (38)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
1.00 (25)
0.28 (7)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
1.0
1.8
1.4
2.0
1.5
Nylatron
Nylatron
Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
1.5 (38)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
1.00 (25)
0.28 (7)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
1.3
2.3
1.8
2.5
1.8
Standard lever
2.00 (51)
250 (64)
Cast aluminum
3.00 (76)
All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters).

For reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes.
Roller lever: Length from the operating shaft axis to the
roller axis.
All other: Length from the operating shaft axis to the tip.

Catalog Number
Max required
return torque
Face (width) (oz-in.)
CautionWhen selecting lever, required return torque

should not exceed minimum return torque in operating
head.
Cap screw accommodates 3/64 inch Allen wrench.
By re-assembling lever minimum can be reduced another 0.50 (13).
Stainless steel Cast aluminum
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
List
Price $
1 unit
3SX03-KL546
3SX03-KL572
3SX03-KL549
3SX03-KL552
3SX03-KL547
3SX03-KL573
3SX03-KL575
3SX03-KL550
3SX03-KL553
3SX03-KL548
3SX03-KL574
3SX03-KL576
3SX03-KL551
3SX03-KL554
Applies when lever extended to maximum dimension.
See dimensions page 13/76.
13/71
Selection

Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versionsmost widely used
Length
Inches (mm)
Roller
Type
Min.
Catalog Number
required
Diameter Face width return torque Stainless
Cast
In. (mm) in. (mm)
steel
aluminum
oz-in
1.50 (38)
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.53
3SX03-KL310
Nylatron
1.5 (38)
0.28 (7)
0.96
3SX03-KL536
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
0.77
3SX03-KL580
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.65
3SX03-KL24
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
1.20
3SX03-KL25
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
0.90
3SX03-KL26
1.50 (38)
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.65
3SX03-KL27
outboard roller
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
1.20
3SX03-KL28
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
0.90
3SX03-KL29
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
1 (25)
1.10
3SX03-KL30
Bantam lever 0.69 (18)
Metal
0.88 (22)
0.19 (5)
0.45
3SX03-KL532
Precision
adjustment
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.65
3SX03-KL340
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
1.20
3SX03-KL465
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
0.90
3SX03-KL535
13.75 (2595)
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.5 (13)
1.90
3SX03-KL599
13.75 (2595)
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
1 (25)
3.10
3SX03-KL537
1.623.75 (4195)
Nylatron
1.5 (38)
0.28 (7)
2.50
3SX03-KL443
0.503.75 (1395)
Large nylatron 4 (102)
0.11 (3)
4.50
3SX03-KL598
13.75 (2595)
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
2.50
3SX03-KL539
0.503.75 (1395)
Without roller
1.20
3SX03-KL31
Fork lever _
both rollers
one side
1.50 (38)
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
1 (25)
3SX03-KL543
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
3SX03-KL544
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
3SX03-KL545
Fork lever _
both rollers
outside, one
side
1.50 (38)
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
3SX03-KL203
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
3SX03-KL541
Ball bearing
0.69 (17)
0.25 (6)
3SX03-KL542
Operator
List Price $
1 unit
Roller levers
Cast aluminum
Stainless steel
Roller on
reverse side
Offset lever
1.50 (38)
(Inboard roller Inboard roller
shown)
1.50 (38)
Adjustable
roller
Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions:

Length
Inches (mm)
Description
Inches (mm)
Min. required
return force
oz-in.
Catalog
Number
Adjustable rod
5.50 (140) Max.

5.50 (140) Max.
8.75 (222) Max
12 (305) Max.
_
_
Nylon Rod0.19 (5) Dia.

Metal Rod0.12 (3) Dia.
Metal Rod (Square)0.12 (3) Max.
Steel (Formable) Rod0.12 (3) Dia.
Clamp Only0.19 (5) Hole
Clamp Only0.12 (3) Hole
0.40
0.92
2.20
5.00
_
_
3SX03-KL399
3SX03-KL202
3SX03-KL581
3SX03-KL226
3SX03-KL35
3SX03-KL36
Spring rod
11.62 (295)
Metal rod
2.80
3SX03-KL421
Adjustable wire
12.12 (308)
max.
Nylon covered wire
1.50
3SX03-KL533
Adjustable wide roller 3.9 (99)

lever
0.75 (19) Dia. Nylatron Roller
4.50
3SX03-KL37
Stainless steel rod
Rod diameter - 0.06 (2)
3SX03-KW3
Operator
List Price $
1 unit
0.19 (30) Dia. Rod
Wobble head operators

See dimensions page 13/76
Length from operating shaft axis to the roller axis.

Maximum dimensions, precision adjustable to lesser
dimensions.
By re-assembling lever minimum can be reduced by 1/2 in.
13/72
Applies when lever extended to maximum dimension.

CautionWhen selecting lever, required return torque should
not exceed minimum return force in operating head.
All dimensions shown in inches and

(millimeters). For reference purposes
only. Not to be used for design or
construction purposes.

Wiring

Wiring diagrams
Single Pole
1 NO - 1 NC
Cable color code

1 - White 6 - Pink
2 - Black 7 - Yellow
3 - Red
8 - Blue
4 - Orange 9 - Green
5 - Brown
Pre-wired cable
Double Pole
1 NO - 1 NC
Modular, plug-in and prewired cable

Red/Blk 1
5 Wht/Blk
Grn/Blk 2
6 Red
Orange 3
7 Black
Blue 4
8 White
7
2
5
8 9
4
Green
Gnd
Prewired receptacle with pin connector
Typical connector cable (supplied by user)

Manufacturers part number
Daniel
Woodhead
Brad Harrison
Cooper
Crouse-Hinds
Molex
(Industrial Interface)
Lumberg USA
3
6
12
9 Pin connector cable
105000A01F030
105000A01F060
105000A01F120
5000111-3_
5000111-4_
5000111-5_
14541
14542
14544
RK50-77/1M
RK50-77/2M
RK50-77/4M
3
6
12
309000A01F030
309000A01F060
309000A01F120
X8990-3
X8990-4
X8990-5
_
_
_
_
_
_
Cable length
ft.
5 Pin connector cable

13/73
Dimensions

Dimension drawings
Plain side plunger
Roller side plunger
Two side plungers
Plain top plunger
Roller top plunger
Rotary lever operators

Dimensions
Catalog
Number
Dimensions
E
Catalog
Number
3SX03-KL200 1.50
0.44 0.20
(11.2) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL554 3.00
3SX03-KL355 1.50
0.44 0.20
(11.2) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL572 2.00
0.75 0.32
(38.1) (19.0) (8.1)
0.42
0.12
(10.7) (3.0)
0.18
(4.6)
0.75 1.00 0.42

0.90
(50.8) (19.0) (25.4) (10.7) (22.9
0.90
(22.9
0.75 1.00 0.44 0.90 0.90 3SX03-KL573 2.50 0.75 1.00 0.42
0.90
(38.1) (19.0) (25.4) (11.2) (22.9) (22.9)
(63.5) (19.0) (25.4) (10.7) (22.9
0.90
(22.9
0.75 0.32
(38.1) (19.0) (8.1)
0.688 0.25
(76.2) (17.5 (6.4)
3SX03-KL377 1.50
3SX03-KL531 1.50
0.688 0.25
(38.1) (17.5) (6.4)
0.44 0.12
(11.2) (3.0)
0.18
(4.6)
3SX03-KL574 3.00
3SX03-KL546 2.00
0.42 0.20
(10.7) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL575 2.50
0.42
0.18
(10.7) (4.6)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL547 2.50
0.42 0.20
(10.7) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL576 3.00
0.42
0.18
(10.7) (4.6)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL548 3.00
0.42 0.20
(10.7) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
With rollers on reverse side
3SX03-KL549 2.00
0.42 0.20
(10.7) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL310 1.50
0.44
0.34
(11.2) (8.6)
0.38
((9.7)
3SX03-KL550 2.50
0.42 0.20
(10.7) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL536 1.50
0.44
0.30
(11.2) (7.6)
0.38
((9.7)
3SX03-KL551 3.00
0.42 0.20
(10.7) (5.1)
0.24
(6.1)
3SX03-KL579 1.50
0.44
0.34
(11.2) (8.6)
0.38
((9.7)
3SX03-KL552 2.00
0.42 0.12
(10.7) (3.0)
0.18
(4.6)
3SX03-KL580 1.50
0.44
0.25
(11.2) (6.4)
0.31
(7.9)
3SX03-KL553 2.50
0.42 0.12
(10.7) (3.0)
0.18
(4.6)
0.75 0.32
(50.8) (19.0) (8.1)
0.75 0.32
(63.5) (19.0) (8.1)
0.75 0.32
(76.2) (19.0) (8.1)
0.75 0.32
(50.8) (19.0) (8.1)
0.75 0.32
(63.5) (19.0) (8.1)
0.75 0.32
(76.2) (19.0) (8.1)
0.688 0.25
(50.8) (17.5) (6.4)
0.688 0.25
(63.5) (17.5) (6.4)
All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purpose only. Not to be used
for design or construction purposes.
13/74
0.75 1.00 0.42

0.90
(76.2) (19.0) (25.4) (10.7) (22.9
1.50 0.29
(63.5) (38.1) (7.4)
1.50 0.29
(76.2) (38.1) (7.4)
0.75 0.32
(38.1) (19.0) (8.1)
1.50 0.28
(38.1) (38.1) (7.1)
0.75 0.32
(38.1) (19.0) (8.1)
0.688 0.25
(38.1) (17.5 (6.4)
0.90
(22.9
Can accommodate both U.S. 1.16 (29.4) x 2.34 (59.5) and DIN 1.18 (30.0) x
2.36 (60.0) mounting dimensions.

Dimensions

Dimension drawings
Fork lever, one roller inside,

one roller outside
Offset roller levers

Catalog
Number
Dimensions
A
Catalog
Number
Outboard roller
3SX03-KL27
0.75 (19)
0.32 (8) 0.03 (1)
3SX03-KL28
0.75 (19)
0.32 (8) 0.03 (1)
3SX03-KL29
0.69 (18)
0.25 (6) 0.04 (1)
3SX03-KL30
0.75 (19)
1.0 (25) _
3SX03-KL24
0.75 (19)
0.32 (8) 0.03 (1)
3SX03-KL25
0.75 (19)
0.32 (8) 0.03 (1)
3SX03-KL26
0.69 (18)
0.25 (6) 0.04 (1)
Fork lever - Both rollers on one side
Dimensions
A
Dimensions
Catalog
Number
3SX03-KL203
0.75 0.32 0.16 0.20 0.73 0.77

(19) (8)
(4)
(5)
(19) (20)
3SX03-KL204
0.75
(19)
0.32
(8)
0.16
(4)
0.20
(5)
3SX03-KL541
0.75 0.32 0.16 0.20 0.73 0.77

(19) (8)
(4)
(5)
(19) (20)
3SX03-KL543
0.75
(19)
1.0
(25)
0.86
(22)
0.86
(22)
3SX03-KL542
0.69 0.25 0.08 0.14 0.64 0.70

(18) (6)
(2)
(4)
(16) (18)
3SX03-KL544
0.75
(19)
0.32
(8)
0.16
(4)
0.20
(5)
3SX03-KL545
0.69
(18)
0.25
(6)
0.08
(2)
0.1
(3)
Inboard roller
Bantam roller lever
Precision adjustment roller lever
Adjustable roller lever
Dimensions
B
Dimensions
Catalog Number
3SX03-KL340
0.69 (18) 0.75 (19) 0.32 (8)
0.48 (12) 0.24 (6)
Catalog Number
0.28 (7)
3SX03-KL201
0.75 (19)
0.32 (8)
0.29 (7)
0.33 (8)
3SX03-KL465
0.69 (18) 0.75 (19) 0.32 (8)
0.48 (12) 0.24 (6)
0.28 (7)
3SX03-KL443
1.5 (38)
0.29 (7)
0.26 (7)
0.32 (8)
3SX03-KL535
0.69 (18) 0.69 (18) 0.25 (6)
0.48 (12) 0.16 (4)
0.22 (6)
3SX03-KL537
0.75 (19)
0.32 (8)
0.29 (7)
0.33 (8)
3SX03-KL538
0.69 (18)
0.25 (6)
0.21 (5)
0.27 (7)
3SX03-KL539
0.69 (18)
0.25 (6)
0.21 (5)
0.27 (7)
3SX03-KL598
0.39 (10)
0.11 (3)
0.11 (3)
0.19 (5)
3SX03-KL599
0.75 (19)
0.5 (13)
0.46 (12)
0.47 (12)
All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For

reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or

13/75

Dimensions
Dimension drawings
Nylon Spring Rod Actuator
3SX03-KL556
Nylon Covered Wire Actuator

3SX03-KL533
Stainless Steel Spring Actuator

3SX03-KL421
Adjustable Rod Actuator
Adjustable rod actuators

Adjustable Wire Roller Actuator
3SX03-KL37
Wobble head
with nylon head
3SE03-DW1
3SX03-KW2
Nylatron Loop Actuator

3SX03-KL142
Wobble head
with coil spring
3SE03-DW1
3SX03-KW4
Dimensions
Catalog
Number
Material
3SX03-KL202
Steel-Round
5.50
(140)
0.120
(3)
3SX03-KL581
Steel-Square
8.75
(222)
0.125
(3)
3SX03-KL399
Nylon
5.50
(140)
0.190
(5)
3SX03-KL220
Stainless Steel
9.00
(229)
0.190
(5)
3SX03-KL226
Plated Steel
12.0
(305)
)0.120
(3)
Wobble head
with stainless steel rod
3SE03-DW1
3SX03-KW3
All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For

reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or
13/76

3SE03 North American Enclosed Switches
Selection
3SE03
Metal enclosure
Description
Features
1/2" Conduit Entrance
Application
NEMA 1 Enclosed Aluminum

Die Cast Housing
NEMA A600, R300 Contacts
These switches are designed for

accurate repeatability. Their
compact size makes them ideal
for use in space-restricted
areas.
Screw Terminals
Booted versions for added
protection
Overall dimensions
UL Recognized
CSA Certified
INO/INC Snap-action
contacts (form c)
Typical applications include

overhead, folding and elevator
doors, sliding gates and other
automated equipment.
Specifications
Catalog
Number
OF Max. - 8.82 - 12.3 oz. (250 - 350 g)

RF Min. 4.02 oz. (114 g)
PT Max. - 0.016 in. (0.4 mm)
OT Min. - 0.217 in. (5.5 mm)
MD Max. - 0.002 in. (0.05 mm)
OP - 1.504 in. (38.2 mm)
3SE03 - EB05
OF Max. - 28.22 oz. (800 g)

RF Min. 8.46 oz. (240 g)
PT Max. - 0.079 in. (2.0 mm)
OT Min. - 0.197 in. (5.0 mm)
MD Max. - 0.004 in. (0.1 mm)
OP - 1.803 in. (45.8 mm)
3SE03 - EB06
OF Max. - 20.1 oz. (570 g)

RF Min. 6.0 oz. (170 g)
PT Max. - 0.157 in. (4.0 mm)
OT Min. - 0.236 in. (6.0 mm)
MD Max. - 0.016 in. (0.4 mm)
3SE03 - EB32
OF Max. - 22.57 oz. (640 g)

RF Min. 8.11 oz. (230 g)
PT Max. - 0.197 in. (5.0 mm)
OT Min. - 0.236 in. (6.0 mm)
MD Max. - 0.016 in. (0.4 mm)
3SE03 - EB33
List Price $
1 unit
Plunger actuator
Booted plunger
Roller lever
Booted roller lever
OF = Operating Force
RF = Return Force
PT = Pretravel
OT = Operating Travel
MD = Movement Differential
OP = Operating Position

13/77
3SE03 North American Enclosed Switches
Specifications
3SE03
Metal enclosure
Dimension drawings
Overall dimensions
Specifications
Catalog Number
OF Max. - 9.92 - 12.3 oz. (250 - 350 g)

RF Min. 4.02 oz. (114 g)
PT Max. - 0.02 in. (0.5 mm)
OT Min. - 0.142 in. (3.6 mm)
MD Max. - 0.002 in. (0.05 mm)
OP - 1.957 in. (49.7 mm)
3SE03 - EB07
OF Max. - 17.64 oz. (500 g)

RF Min. 3.53 oz. (100 g)
PT Max. - 0.039 in. (1.0 mm)
OT Min. - 0.138 in. (3.5 mm)
MD Max. - 0.006 in. (0.12 mm)
OP - 1.957 in. (49.7 mm)
3SE03 - EB08
List Price $
1 unit
Roller plunger
Booted roller plunger
Technical data
Mechanical Life
3,000,000 operations maximum
Electrical Life
500,000 operations minimum
Operating Speed
0.01 m/second to 1m/second
Cable Entry
1/2" NPT
Temperature Range
-15 to 80 (5 to 176F)
Degree of Protection NEMA 1

Mounting
Any Position
NEMA Rating
A600, R300
Non-Inductive Load (A)

Rated Voltage (V)1)2) Resistive load Lamp load
NC-NO
NO
125 VAC
3
15
NC
Inductive load (A)

Inductive load Motor load
NC-NO
NO
NC
1.5
15
2.5
250 VAC
15
2.5
1.25
15
1.5
500 VAC
1.5
0.75
2.5
1.5
0.75
8 VDC
15
1.5
15
2.5
14 VDC
15
1.5
10
2.5
30 VDC
6 (2)
1.5
2.5
125 VDC
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.05
0.05
0.05
250 VDC
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.03
0.03
0.03
Inrush current (A)

NO
NC
30 maximum 15 maximum
1) Inductive load has power

factor of 0.04 minimum (AC)
and a time of 7m/second (DC)
2) Lamp load has an inrush
current of 6 times steady-state
current.
13/78


Cable-Operated Switches
Application
Cable-operated switches are
used for monitoring or for EMERGENCY-STOP facilities on particularly endangered system
sections. They are available with
metal enclosures.
Principle of operation
The switch contacts of the cableoperated switches and the conveyor belt unbalance protection
devices are positive opening.
As the effective range of a cableoperated switch is limited by the

length of the pull-wire, large systems can also be protected.
Cable-operated switches (requiring pulling at both ends) and

conveyor belt unbalance trackers are used primarily for
monitoring very long belt systems.
Specifications
Switches with latching for implementation in EMERGENCYSTOP equipment correspond to
the EN 418 standard.
Cable-operated switches with

one-side operation are held in
free position by the pre-tension
force on the turnbuckle.
In the 3SE7 140, -150 and -160

cable-operated switches, both
switching contacts are available for cable-break/cable pull
signaling. The NO contact is
used, for example, for signaling purposes.
For switches with latching, with a

pretensioned cable, the locking
must be deactivated beforehand
in order to return the switch to its
free position.
Technical data
Type
Standards
Certifications
Electrical design
Electrical loading
3SE7 120
3SE7 150
3SE7 140
3SE7 141
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1; IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1; EN ISO 13850
UL / CSA
Contacts electrically isolated from each other
3SE7 160
at AC-15
minimum
AC 400 V, 6A
AC/DC 24 V, 10 mA
6 A (Slow acting)
> 1 x 106 operating cycles
Fine silver
By pulling or breaking of a rope (cable)
10 m
25 m
AC 250 V, 2A
AC 400 V, 6A
50 m
75 m 1)
2 x 50 m
2.5 m
5m
5m
5m
IP67
1P65
3x(M20x1.5)
2x(M25x1.5)
Short circuit protection

Contact material
Actuation
Rope length, maximum
Spacing between rope
supports, maximum
3m
Enclosure
Cover
acc. To IEC 60529
GDAL alloy, coated (color), dark black RAL 9005

Shock-resistant thermoplastic
Ambient temperature
Mounting
Mounting space
Cable entry
-25C to +70C
Designed for M 5
30 mm and 40 mm
2x(M20x1.5)
Type of connection
M3.5 screw connection; Self-lifting pressure plate terminals
IP65
2x(M20x1.5)
1x(M16x1.5)
3SE7 310
Travel diagrams
3SE7 120-2DD01
13
14
21
22
3SE7 140-1.F00
3SE7 141-1EG10
3SE7 140-1.D0.
Central position
NSC0_006 45
Central position
Central position
3SE7 120-1BF00, 3SE7 150-1BF00
3SE7 160-1AE, 3SE7 310-1AE
3SE7 150-1.D00, 3SE7 150-2DD00

mm
10
21-22
13-14
Central position
Wire tension
Interlock
C e nt r a l p o s i t i o n
Central position
3
5
NSC0_00294a
Central
position
Interlock
0
Wire break
Central position
1) 75 m cable length possible provided the ambient temperature range is strictly observed, otherwise, 50 m.

13/79
2 contacts With one-side actuation Degree of protection IP 65 Latching according to EN 418 2)

for cable
lengths 1)
Maximum
D esi gn
spacing
between the
cable
supports
Contacts
Order No.
(NO as signalling
contact)
List
Weight
Price $ approx.
1 unit
kg
Cable-operated switches 2)
3SE7 120-1BF00
3SE7 150-1BD00
10
25
2.5
Metal enclosure
(cover made of molded plastic)
Without latching, only cable pull
monitoring
M25 x 1.5 Conduit
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 120-2DD01
0.395
With latching and button reset

M20 x 1.5 Conduit
2 NC
3SE7 120-1BF00
0.410
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 150-2DD00
0.425
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 150-2DD04
0.425
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 150-1BD00
0.445
2 NC
3SE7 150-1BF00
0.440
with LED, RED, 24 VDC 3)
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 150-1BD04
0.450
with latching and key reset
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 150-1CD00
0.510
1 NO + 3 NC
3SE7 141-1EG10
0.790
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 140-1BD00
0.792
2 NC
3SE7 140-1BF00
0.790
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 140-1BD04
0.820
with latching and key unlatching
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 140-1CD00
0.835
Metal enclosure with M 25 conduit

with two-direction actuation, latching and
button reset
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7 160-1AE00
1.270
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 160-1BD00
0.300
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7 160-1AE04
1.200
Metal enclosure with M25 conduit

with latching and pressure unlatching
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7 310-1AE00
1.805
with LED, RED, 24 VDC
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7 310-1AE04
1.815

(cover made of molded plastic) with dust
protection and alignment window
Without latching
3SE7 141-1EG10
75 4)

with EMERGENCY STOP and
Lockout release
3SE7 140-1B.00
50

with dust protection
3SE7 160-1AE00
2 75
Conveyor belt unbalance protection device

3SE7 310-1AE00
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) These cable lengths can be used with max. temperature deviations
of 15. 75 m cable length possible probided the ambient temperature
range is strictly observed, otherwise, 50 m.
13/80
3) LED, RED, 24 VDC with M 20 x 1.5 thread and 25 mm dia. lens,

3SX3 235.
4) 75 m rope length possible provided the ambient temperature range is
strictly observed, otherwise 50 m max.
Product Category: SFTY

Accessories
Description
Length / diameter
Order No.
10 m
3SE7 910-3AA
0.420
15 m
3SE7 910-3AB
0.665
20 m
3SE7 910-3AC
0.865
50 m
3SE7 910-3AH
2.065
Oval
4 mm
3SE7 941-1AC
0.040
Simplex
4 mm
3SE7 943-1AC
0.010
Duplex
4 mm
3SE7 944-1AC
0.020
Single
5 mm
3SE7 942-1AA
0.025
Steel ropes 1)
4 mm
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
kg
Rope clamps
Tension springs (zinc-plated)

to maintain the counter-tension
13 N
3SE7 931-1AB
0.150
35 N, for wires up to 50 m
3SE7 931-1AD
0.340
> 35 N, for wires up to 2 x 75 m
3SE7 931-1AE
0.340
4 mm
3SE7 921-1AC
0.045
Mounting of the rope roller
3SE7 921-1AA
0.015
3SE7 930-1AD
0.005
incl. nut M 8
3SE7 920-1AB
0.035
incl. nut M 10
3SE7 920-1AC
0.060
M 6 60
3SE7 950-1AB
0.055
M 6 110
3SE7 950-1AD
0.075
Rope rollers for changing the direction of the

rope, rotatable
Rope eyes for changes in rope direction and

improved power transmission at the fixing points
(1 set = 4 units)
4 mm
Eyebolts for fixing the rope
Turnbuckle for precise adjustment of the

pretension
1) Diameter including casing; the diameter of the steel wire is 3.2 mm.

13/81
Dimension drawings
Metal enclosure
3SE7 120-2DD.., 3SE7 150-2DD..
without latching
Metal enclosure
3SE7 140-1B...
with latching and button reset
Metal enclosure
3SE7 120-1B..., 3SE7 150-1B...

3SE7 140-1ECD.
3SE7 150-1CD..
3SE7 141-1EG10.
with EMERGENCY STOP and Lockout release
3SE7 160-1AE..
3SE7 310-1AE.. conveyor belt unbalance protection device

13/82

Configuration
Mounting and fixing the wire
Short lengths of the wire up to 25 m
Long lengths of the wire up to 50 m
Pulling from both sides up to 2 x 75 m
Preloading and actuating forces

The values quoted apply to switch mounting at an ambient temperature of 20 C. No allowance is made for lengthening of the
wire through stretching and deformation of the wire eye.
Type
Preloading
force
Operating
distance
Actuating
force1)
Max. wire
length
cm
55
11
10
3SE7 150 200
11
25
25
3SE7 140 295 ... 390
13
38 ... 60
50
3SE7 141 100
20 ... 22
28 ... 34
75
3SE7 160 --
32 ... 40
45 ... 85
2 75
3SE7 120
1)
The actuating forces quoted are only guide values because the spring
forces are subject to tolerances.

13/83
Interlock Switches
3SE5 / 3SE2 with separate actuator

General data
Overview
Position switches with separate actuator are used where the position of doors, covers or protective grills must be monitored for
safety reasons.
3SE5 position switches with separate actuator have the same
enclosures as the standard switches (modular system).
Operation
The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actuation from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 x 90. The
switches can also be approached from above.
The actuator heads of the 3SE2 243 and 3SE2 257 switches with
special enclosures cannot be changed. The switches can be
approached from the two broad sides and from above.
The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the position switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of
six versions to suit the application (see page 13/89).
The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary
devices is impossible.
Radius actuators
The position switches with radius actuators are particularly suitable for rotatable protective devices. The movable actuation key
allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch
and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented.
Locking devices
A high-grade steel blocking device for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety (see page 13/89).
Design
Enclosure sizes
The 3SE5 switches are available in various enclosure sizes:
1 cable entry
Plastic enclosures (50 mm wide), 2 cable entries
1 cable entry
Metal enclosures (56 mm wide), 3 cable entries
Also available is a switch in the 3SE2 series, which has arisen in
this form according to general market requirements:
Molded-plastic enclosure outside of the standards, enclosure
width 52 mm.
Enclosure versions
Various basic versions can be selected for the enclosures of the
3SE5 series:
Available with two- or three-pole contact blocks designed as
slow-action contacts
Optional LED status display
With mounted four- or five-pole M12 connector socket (available for the wide enclosures as an accessory for self-assembly)
With 6-pole connector socket + PE on the metal enclosures
Similarly with a combination of connector socket and LED indicators
For a description of the basic switches see page 13/4.
13/84
Blocking device with padlock
Dust protection
A rubber cap to protect the actuator head from contamination is
available for operation in dusty environments (see page 13/89).
Contact reliability
The new contact blocks ensure an extremely high contact stability. This applies even when the devices are switching low voltages and currents, e. g. 1 mA at 5 V DC.
Positive opening q
The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically,
positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to
as "positive opening".

Interlock Switches

Type
3SE5 1..-..V.., 3SE5 2..-..V..
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Standards
400
Class 3
kV
2-pole
3-pole
With alternating current 50/60 Hz

- At 24 V
- A t 120 V
- A t 240 V
A
A
A
Ie /AC-15
6
6
3
Ie /AC-15
6
3
1.5
For direct current

- At 24 V
- A t 125 V
- A t 250 V
A
A
A
Ie /DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
Ie /DC-13
3
0.55
0.27

0.1 106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie /AC-15 at 240 V
With DC current the endurance of the switching element depends not only on the breaking current
but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given.
Switching frequency
Rated data acc. to s, u and U.

Rated voltage
300
Switching capacity
Heavy duty, A 300/ B 300 /Q 300
Type
3SE5 23.
3SE5 24.
3SE5 11.
3SE5 12.
Enclosure
Enclosure
Material
Width
Ultramid A3X2G7
mm
31
50
40
56
Dimensions acc. to EN
EN 50047
--
EN 50041
--
IP65
IP66/IP67
1 (M20 1.5)
3 (M20 1.5)
Ambient temperature
During operation
25 ... +85
In operation, switch with LEDs
25 ... +70
S torage, transport
40 ... +90
Any
Mounting position
Connection
1 (M20 1.5)
Cable entry
2 (M20 1.5)
Conductor cross-sections2)
Solid
mm
2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
mm
2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Tightening torque, contact block
NM
0.8 ... 1.0

inside enclosure
--
1)
2)
For the maximum number of connectable conductors for the respective

contact block see operating instructions. Download from:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

M3.5
13/85
Interlock Switches

Type
3SE2 257-.XX..
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Pollution degree acc. to EN 60664
3SE2 243-.XX..
500
Class 3
Rated operating voltage Ue
AC 500; over AC 380 V only for equal potential
Continuous thermal current Ith
10
For alternating current 40 ... 60 Hz

- at 24 V
- a t 125 V
- a t 230 V
- a t 400 V
- a t 500 V
A
A
A
A
A
Ie / AC-12
10
10
10
10
10
Ie / AC-15
10
10
6
4
3
For direct current

- at 24 V
- at 48 V
- a t 110 V
- a t 220 V
- a t 440 V
A
A
A
A
A
Ie / DC-12
10
6
4
1
0.5
Ie / DC-13
10
4
1
0.4
0.2
Operational class gL/gG
Quick response characteristic
10
Rated operating current Ie

Ie / AC-12
10
10
10
10
10
Ie / AC-15
10
10
4
4
3
Short circuit protection1),

DIAZED fuse links
> 1 x106 operating cycles
With 3RH11,
3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
> 1 x106 operating cycles
For AC-15 duty
0.5 x106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
For DC-13 duty
With DC the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage, the circuit
inductance and the speed of switching.
Operating frequency
with 3RH11,
3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
6 x103 operating cycles/h
Type
3SE2 243
3SE2 257
Enclosure
Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplastic
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529
IP67
3SE2 243,
3SE2 257
IP67
Ambient temperature
in operation
30 ... +85 C
for storage, transport

Mounting position
Any
Cable entry
1 x (M 20 x 1.5)
1 x (M 16 x 1.5)
Solid
1 x (0.5 ... 1.5 mm),

2 x (0.5 ... 1 mm)
1 x (0.5 ... 1.5 mm),

2 x (0.5 ... 1 mm)
1 x (0.5 ... 1.5 mm),

2 x (0.5 ... 1 mm)
1 x (0.5 ... 1.5 mm),

2 x (0.5 ... 1 mm)
Protective conductor terminal

inside enclosure
1) Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
13/86

Interlock Switches

with separate actuator
Complete units
2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP65 or IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version1)
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

5 directions of approach
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 232-0RV40
1 unit
102
0.150
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 232-0QV40
1 unit
102
0.155
With separate
actuator
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 234-0RV40-1AC4
1 unit
102
0.165
2 NC
3SE5 234-0QV40-1AE0
1 unit
102
0.170
--
With M12 socket

1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 232-1RV40
1 unit
102
0.155
1 NO + 1 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 232-3RV40
1 unit
102
0.110
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 234-1RV40-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.175
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 242-0QV40
1 unit
102
0.110

and 2 LEDs
With 2 LEDs
With separate
actuator
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 242-1QV40
1 unit
102
0.120
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 242-3QV40
1 unit
102
0.120
With 2 LEDs
1)
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/89).

13/87
Interlock Switches

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version1)
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 112-0QV10
1 unit
102
0.360
With separate
actuator
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5 114-0RV10-1AC5
1 unit
102
0.360
2 NC
3SE5 114-0QV10-1AE1
1 unit
102
0.360
3SE5 115-0QV10-1AD1
1 unit
102
0.380
--
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (250 V, 10 A)

1 NO + 2 NC --
With M12 socket

1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 112-1QV10
1 unit
102
0.370
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 112-3QV10
1 unit
102
0.370
3SE5 114-1RV10-1AF3
1 unit
102
0.360
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 115-1RV10-1AF2
1 unit
102
0.380
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5 122-0QV10
1 unit
102
0.360

and 2 LEDs
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (10 A)

and 2 LEDs
With separate
actuator
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5 122-1QV10
1 unit
102
0.370
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5 122-3QV10
1 unit
102
0.370
With 2 LEDs
1)
13/88

Interlock Switches

Accessories
Version
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Actuators for 3SE5

Standard actuators,
length 75.6 mm
3SE5 000-0AV01
1 unit
102
0.040
With vertical fixing,

length 53 mm
3SE5 000-0AV02
1 unit
102
0.070
With transverse fixing,

length 47 mm
3SE5 000-0AV03
1 unit
102
0.070
3SE5 000-0AV01
3SE5 000-0AV02
3SE5 000-0AV03
Radius actuators,
length 51 mm
3SE5 000-0AV06
Direction of approach from the left
3SE5 000-0AV04
1 unit
102
0.070
Direction of approach from the right
3SE5 000-0AV06
1 unit
102
0.070
Universal radius actuators,

length 77 mm
3SE5 000-0AV05
1 unit
102
0.090
Length 67 mm
3SE5 000-0AV07-1AK2
1 unit
102
0.120
Length 77 mm
3SE5 000-0AV07
1 unit
102
0.090
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA2
1 unit
102
0.010
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA3
1 unit
102
0.065
Connector sockets (4-pole), M12, fixed

for M20 1.5
For max. 250 V, 4 A
3SY3 127
1 unit
102
0.010

With terminal compartment, can be preassembled
3RX8 000-0CB45
1 unit
574
0.015
Angular cable boxes (4-pole), M12

With terminal compartment, can be preassembled
3RX8 000-0CC45
1 unit
574
0.015

for M20 1.5
For max. 125 V, 4 A
3SY3 128
1 unit
102
0.010

With terminal compartm., can be pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CB55
1 unit
574
0.016

3RX8 000-0CC55
1 unit
574
0.016
Cable glands M20 1.5

Plastic
3SX9 926
1 unit
102
0.010
3SE5 000-0AV05
Universal radius actuators, heavy-duty
3SE5 000-0AV07
Optional accessories for 3SE5

Protective caps made of black rubber for the
actuator head, to protect the actuator openings
from contamination
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA2
Not to be used for 3SE5 2.. plastic enclosures.

Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator
head, for up to 8 padlocks
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA3
Connections for 3SE5, 3SE2
3SY3 127
3SX9 926

3RX8 000
Product Category: POSW / SFTY
13/89
Interlock Switches

1 contact 3 contacts Moving double-break contacts 1)2)
Actuation
Enclo- Length
sure
of acwidth tuator
with 1 slow-action contact
6 mm stroke
Ident. No. 12
acc. to EN 50 013
Order No.
mm
mm
List
Price $
1 unit
Wght.
appr
ox.
6 mm stroke
Wght. Ident. No. 01

appro acc. to EN 50 013
x.
Order No.
kg
List
Price $
1 unit
kg
Molded plastic enclosure IP 67

3SE2 243-0XX Top and side entry1)
Extraction force 5 N
52
3SE2 243-0XX40
0.140
3SE2 257-6XX40
0.120
52
3SE2 243-0XX
0.140
3SE2 257-6XX
0.120
With automatic ejection
52
3SE2 243-0XX30
0.140
3SE2 257-6XX30
0.120

52
3SE2 243-0XX48
0.140
3SE2 257-6XX48
0.140
52
3SE2 243-0XX18
0.140
3SE2 257-6XX18
0.140
With automatic ejection
52
3SE2 243-0XX38
0.140
3SE2 257-6XX38
0.140
Actuators
Standard actuator
(rmin. = 150 mm)
28
3SX3 218
0.020
Radius actuator
(universal)
(rmin. = 45 mm)
33
3SX3 228
0.025
Ball catch
(up to 100 N)
28
3SX3 217
0.035
Actuator with dust

protector and slit cover
(1 set)
34
3SX3 234
0.035
Radius actuator
82
3SX3 256
0.020
3SX3 233
0.005
Accessories
Slit cover only for 3SX3234
(1 set = 3 units)
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Page 13/94.

13/90
1) Supplied without actuator.

Interlock Switches
3SE5 with separate actuator

Metal and plastic enclosures
Configuration
Operation and operating travel of actuators
Operation by a separate actuator
Contact blocks

to EN 50013
vmax

Nominal travel
Contact closed
Contact open
Actuator in actuator head: NC is closed
Separate actuators
Lateral actuation
Axial actuation
Axial and lateral actuation (4 90)
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 ...-.RV..
3SE5 ...-.RV..
22
14
21
13
1,7 2,5
mm
2,4 **
NSC0_00921
30
NSC0_00920
90
< 2 mm
NSC0_00769
Standard actuators
13-14
21-22 **
30
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 ...-.QV..
NSC0_00892
Minimum force required in operating direction 30 N

(on retraction)
21 31 13
1,7 2,5
mm
2,4 **
13-14
3SE5 ...-.QV..
NSC0_00923
30
13-14
21-22 **
31-32 **
30
Ident. No. 12
2,5
2,4
1,7
mm
**
13-14
90
NSC0_00770
22 32 14
NSC0_00922
1 NO + 2 NC
**
21-22
** 31-32
**
< 2 mm
90
** 21-22
2,5
2,4
1,7
mm
90
Radius actuators (all directions of approach)

Example: direction of approach from the left
NSC0_00893
For connector assignment, see page 13/10.

13/91
Interlock Switches

Complete units
3SE5 23.-.QV40, 3SE5 23.-.RV40
25
3SE5 24.-.QV40, 3SE5 24.-.RV40
42
40
25
32,7
13
3SE5 11.--.QV10, 3SE5 11.-.RV10
NSC0_00795
53
15
33
3SE5 12.-.QV10, 3SE5 12.-.RV10
32
36,5
16,3
20,6
16,3
32
36,5
20,6
12,5
32
32
M20x1,5
5,5
50
33
12,5
13,5
15
18,5 4,4
NSC0_00794
68
20
22
M20x1,5
31
36
20,6
12,5
13
20,6
4,3
20
22
32,7
36
4,3
5,4
M20x1,5
30
40,5
NSC0_00797
M20x1,5
20
NSC0_00796a
5,3
78
60
78
40
56
15,3
37,3
5,5
15,3
37,8
Actuators
3SE5 000-0AV01
standard actuator
3SE5 000-0AV02
actuator with vertical fixing
3SE5 000-0AV03
actuator with horizontal fixing
4,5
4,5
NSC0_00781
18
3SE5 000-0AV04
radius actuator, approach from left
9,6
3SE5 000-0AV06
radius actuator approach from right
9,6
5,5
22
NSC0_00784
40
50
31
68
51,1
4,5
13/92
3SE5 000-0AV05
universal radius actuator
NSC0_00782a
31
22
31
NSC0_00783
28
40
58
18
53
68
4,5
NSC0_00779
0
47
30
31
31
40
NSC0_00780
58
20
15
31
75,6
51,1
4,5
28
77
40
39,5
50
40
50

Interlock Switches

15
27,7
15
46
77
G_NSC0_00930
3SE5 000-0AV07
universal radius actuator, heavy duty
50
29
5,5
40
60
15
60
15
27,7
30
G_NSC0_00931

13/93
Interlock Switches

Plastic enclosures
Configuration
Contact blocks
vmax
acc. to EN 50013

Minimum force required in operating direction on retraction
Nominal travel
Radius actuation:
for all directions of approach
Contact closed
Contact open
Actuator in actuator head:
NC is closed
Separate actuators
Standard and radius actuators
Lateral actuation
Axial and lateral actuation
1 NC
3SE2 257.XX..
0
*)
50
R min 1
2,3
5,5
30 N
or
5N
8
11-12
NSC0_00275a
mm
22
3SE3 243: 90 mm
3SE3 257: 75 mm
Ident. No. 01
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 243.XX..
0
2,3
5,2 5,5
30 N
or
5N
8
13-14
21-22
31-32
mm
NSC0_00274a
NSC0_00273a
Ident. No. 12
30
*) Radius actuator: R min > 38 mm.
7
11
5,5
27
90
30
10
9
13
56
40
15,5
25,5
20,5
15
M20/M16
NSC0_00380c
14 8
2,8
9
13
52
5,5
30
for M 5 tapping screw
2,5
6,5
27
NSC0_00382a
5,5
13/94
15,7
4,8
3SX3 217
actuator with ball locating
28,5
20,5
2
M20/M16
52
16
27
29
18
15,5
8
29
18
5,5
75
2,5
6,5
28
56
40
25,5
20,5
2,8
16
27
40
3SX3 228
universal radius actuator
40
28
for M5
tapping screw
NSC0_00383b
56
5,5
3SE2 257, lateral and front-end actuation
NSC0_00381a
3SE2 243, lateral and front-end actuation,

with 3SX3 218 standard actuator

Interlock Switches
3SE5 / 3SE2 with solenoid locking

General data
Overview
The position switches with solenoid interlocking are exceptional,
technically safe devices which restrict and prevent an unforeseen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles
or other covers as long as a dangerous situation is present
(i. e. follow-on motion of the shutdown machine).
Locking devices
A high-grade steel locking device for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety (see page 13/100).
Dust protection
A rubber cap to protect the actuator head from contamination is
available for operation in dusty environments (see page 13/100).
Solenoid interlocking
There are two versions for locking the actuator:
Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle) with various release mechanisms
Magnetic field lock (open-circuit principle)
The spring-actuated switch is equipped with an auxiliary release
for emergency situations or setup mode. Available as options:
Escape release or
Emergency release
Contact blocks
The safety position switches with solenoid interlocking are comprised of a switch part with electromechanical interlock and a
mechanical actuator which has to be ordered separately.
They are rugged protective devices that enable the greatest
possible safety for man and machine.
The position switches with solenoid interlocking have one contact block each for:
Monitoring the actuator or the position of the protective door
Monitoring the position of the solenoid
The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the requirements of the failsafe principle according to EN 1088.
Optical signaling equipment
The position switches with solenoid interlocking are offered in

plastic or metal enclosures.
Dimensions (W H D):
3SE5 3: 54 mm 185 mm 43.5 mm,
3SE2 8: 90 mm 100 mm (+ head 41.3 mm) 45 mm.
The position switches with solenoid interlocking are available

with an optional optical signaling device.
Operation
Protective device Interlock
The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actuation from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 x 90. The
3SE5 3 switches can also be approached from above.
Closed
Released
1)
Closed
Closed
2)
Open
Open
1)
The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the position switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of
six versions to suit the application (see page 13/100).
The signaling device indicates the switch position of the lock

and the protective device optically by means of 2 LEDs on the
front.
Display
Meaning
2)
Actuator free
to be pulled
Actuator
locked
Actuator
pulled
Actuation data:
Maximum actuating speed vmax = 1.5 m/s
Minimum actuating speed vmin = 0.4 mm/s
Minimum force in the direction of actuation Fmin = 30 N
Note:
The voltage of the LEDs at the monitored contacts must be the
same as the operational voltage of the solenoid (same potential).
The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary

devices is impossible.
1)
Yellow LED.
2)
Green LED.
Radius actuators
The position switches with radius actuators are particularly suitable for rotatable protective devices. The movable actuation key
allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch
and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented.

13/95
Interlock Switches

General data
Benefits
The new generation of 3SE5 3 position switches offers:
More safety through higher locking forces:
- 1300 N with plastic enclosure
- 2600 N with metal enclosure
Various release mechanisms: lock release, escape release
and emergency release
Two contact blocks each with three contacts as standard
equipment, hence fewer versions needed
Same dimensions for all enclosure variants:
Plastic, metal or with integrated ASIsafe
An extensive range of actuators
An optional LED status display 24 V DC, 115 V AC or
230 V AC for all switch variants
There are two versions of locking:

Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle)
In the standard version, the position switch locks by means of
spring force and releases by means of electromagnetic force.
In the case of voltage failure, it reliably prevents the protective
device from opening when machine parts are still moving.
The switch is equipped with an auxiliary release for emergency
situations or setup mode.
An auxiliary release which can be secured with a lock to prevent misuse is available as a version.
Application
The position switches with solenoid interlocking are exceptional,
technically safe devices which restrict and prevent an unforeseen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles
or other covers as long as a dangerous situation is present
(i.e. follow-on motion of the shutdown machine).
The safety position switches with solenoid interlocking have the
following functions:
Enabling the machine or process with closed and locked protective device
Locking the machine or process with opened protective device
Position monitoring of the protective device and solenoid
Standards
The switches comply with the standards IEC 60947-1 (Low-Voltage Controlgear, General) and IEC 60947-5-1 (Electromechanical Control Devices).
The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the requirements of the failsafe principle according to EN 1088.
Approvals
The switches are approved for use with locking devices according to EN 1088 and EN 292, Parts 1 and 2.
Auxiliary release
Auxiliary release with lock
The new 3SE5 3 position switches are also available with an escape release or an emergency release.
Personnel working inside the hazard zone can use the escape
release feature to manually release the interlock without tools
from the escape side (hazardous area side) so that they can
exit the hazard area. An intentional act (in this case pulling the
gray actuator) is required to release the locking mechanism
and restore the normal operating state.
The emergency release enables someone in an emergency situation to manually release the interlock without tools from the
access side (outside the hazardous area). Releasing the lock
and restoring the normal operating state must require effort
which is comparable to repair activity, in this case disassembly
of the red actuator and resetting the mechanical lock.
3SE5 3 position switches with solenoid interlocking bear the VDE

test mark for tested according to GS-ET19 (Test Principles of the
German Trade Association for Locking Devices with Electromagnetic Interlocks).
The 3SE2 8 metal-enclosed position switches with solenoid interlocking have been awarded a test certificate from the BIA
(Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut fr Arbeitssicherheit).
Category 3 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) can be attained with a position switch with solenoid interlocking if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly
installed, e. g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching units from the
ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges.
Category 4 can be achieved when using an additional position
switch.
They are approved according to UL 508, UL 50 and UL 746-C.
Solenoid interlocking
The separate actuator operates in a similar way to the coding of
a key and protects against manipulation. It transmits the locking
force to the protective device and helps to monitor its position.
13/96
Escape release from the front
Emergency release from the back
Magnetic field lock (open-circuit principle)

The second version offers locking by means of electromagnetic force and release by means of spring force. This version
has an advantage when it is necessary to quickly access the
machine after a power failure occurs, or in the case of very
short overtravel times.

Interlock Switches

Type
3SE5 322
3SE5 312
3SE2 83, 3SE2 84
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Standards

250
Class 3
kV
DC
24
24
AC 50/60 Hz
230
110 ... 130
10
A
A
A
Ie /AC-15 or B300
6
3
1.5
Ie /AC-12
10
10
10
Ie /AC-15
4
4
4
Ie /DC-13 or Q300
3
--0.55
-0.27
Ie /DC-12
10
5
2.5
-1
--
Ie /DC-13
3
1.5
0.7
-0.3
--

230

With alternating current 50/60 Hz
- At 24 V
- A t 120 V
- A t 230 V
For direct current
- At 24 V
- At 60 V
- At 110 V
- A t 125 V
- At 220 V
- A t 250 V
A
A
Magnet
Locking force, max.
1300
2600
1820
Locking force acc. to GS-ET 19
1000
2000
1400
Power consumption at Uc
3.5
5.2
--
10
0.5
--
Characteristic quick
1 105 operating cycles,

when interrupting Ie /AC-15 at 230 V
0.5 106 operating cycles,

when interrupting Ie /AC-15 at 230 V
With DC current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the
voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching.
Switching frequency
6 103 operating cycles/h
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
30 g/11 ms
Type
3SE5 322
3SE5 312
3SE2 83, 3SE2 84
Enclosure material
Ultramid A3X2G7
Aluminum (GD - AlSi 12)
IP66/IP67
IP67
--
Enclosure
Ambient temperature
During operation
25 ... +60
30 ... +70
During storage, transport
40 ... +80
--
Any
Mounting position
Connection
M 20 1.5
Cable entry
M 20 1.5
S olid
mm 1 (0.5 ... 1.5)
mm 2 (0.5 ... 0.75)

Inside enclosure
1)
--
2 2.5
2 1.5
M3.5
Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.

13/97
Interlock Switches

with locking force up to 1200 N
6 slow-action contacts 5 directions of approach Cable entry 3 M20 1.5 Degree of protection IP66/IP67
Locking force 1300 N (1000 N according to GS-ET 19)
Interlock1)
LEDs
Solenoid
DT Complete units
Position monitoring:
Actuators:
1 NO + 2 NC
Solenoid:
1 NO + 2 NC
Order No.
V
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
1300 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm

Spring-actuated locks
With auxiliary release
3SE5 312-0SD2.
With lock
--
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SD21
1 unit
102
0.590
--
115 AC
3SE5 322-0SD22
1 unit
102
0.590
--
230 AC
3SE5 322-0SD23
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 322-1SD21
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 322-2SD22
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 322-3SD23
1 unit
102
0.590
--
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SE21
1 unit
102
0.745
--
115 AC
3SE5 322-0SE22
1 unit
102
0.745
--
230 AC
3SE5 322-0SE23
1 unit
102
0.745
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 322-1SE21
1 unit
102
0.745
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 322-2SE22
1 unit
102
0.745
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 322-3SE23
1 unit
102
0.745
3SE5 312-0SE2.
With escape release
from the front
--
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SF21
1 unit
102
0.590
--
115 AC
3SE5 322-0SF22
1 unit
102
0.590
--
230 AC
3SE5 322-0SF23
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 322-1SF21
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 322-2SF22
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 322-3SF23
1 unit
102
0.590
3SE5 312-0SF2.
With escape release
from the back
and auxiliary release
from the front
--
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SG21
1 unit
102
0.590
--
115 AC
3SE5 322-0SG22
1 unit
102
0.590
--
230 AC
3SE5 322-0SG23
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 322-1SG21
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 322-2SG22
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 322-3SG23
1 unit
102
0.590
--
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SH21
1 unit
102
0.745
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SJ21
1 unit
102
0.745
115 AC
3SE5 322-0SJ22
1 unit
102
0.745
230 AC
3SE5 322-0SJ23
1 unit
102
0.745
24 DC
3SE5 322-1SJ21
1 unit
102
0.745
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 322-2SJ22
1 unit
102
0.745
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 322-3SJ23
1 unit
102
0.745
3SE5 312-0SG2.
With escape release
from the back
with lock from the front
With emergency release -from the back

-and auxiliary release
-from the front
Yellow/Green
3SE5 312-0SJ2.
Magnetic field locks
--
24 DC
3SE5 322-0SB21
1 unit
102
0.590
--
115 AC
3SE5 322-0SB22
1 unit
102
0.590
--
230 AC
3SE5 322-0SB23
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 322-1SB21
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 322-2SB22
1 unit
102
0.590
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 322-3SB23
1 unit
102
0.590
3SE5 312-0SB2.
1)
13/98

Interlock Switches

6 slow-action contacts 5 directions of approach Cable entry 3 M20 1.5 Degree of protection IP66/IP67
Locking force 2600 N (2000 N according to GS-ET 19)
Interlock1)
LEDs
Solenoid
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
DT Complete units
Position monitoring:
Actuators:
1 NO + 2 NC
Solenoid:
1 NO + 2 NC
Order No.
V
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
2600 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm

Spring-actuated locks
3SE5 312-0SD1.
With lock
3SE5 312-0SE1.
With escape release
from the front
--
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SD11
1 unit
102
1.030
--
115 AC
3SE5 312-0SD12
1 unit
102
1.030
--
230 AC
3SE5 312-0SD13
1 unit
102
1.030
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 312-1SD11
1 unit
102
1.040
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 312-2SD12
1 unit
102
1.040
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 312-3SD13
1 unit
102
1.040
--
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SE11
1 unit
102
1.180
--
115 AC
3SE5 312-0SE12
1 unit
102
1.180
--
230 AC
3SE5 312-0SE13
1 unit
102
1.180
48 AC/DC
3SE5 312-0SE14
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 312-1SE11
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 312-2SE12
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 312-3SE13
1 unit
102
1.180
--
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SF11
1 unit
102
1.180
--
115 AC
3SE5 312-0SF12
1 unit
102
1.180
--
230 AC
3SE5 312-0SF13
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 312-1SF11
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 312-2SF12
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 312-3SF13
1 unit
102
1.180
3SE5 312-0SF1.
With escape release
from the back
from the front
--
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SG11
1 unit
102
1.175
--
115 AC
3SE5 312-0SG12
1 unit
102
1.175
--
230 AC
3SE5 312-0SG13
1 unit
102
1.175
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 312-1SG11
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 312-2SG12
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 312-3SG13
1 unit
102
1.180
--
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SH11
1 unit
102
1.180
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SJ11
1 unit
102
1.180
115 AC
3SE5 312-0SJ12
1 unit
102
1.180
230 AC
3SE5 312-0SJ13
1 unit
102
1.180
24 DC
3SE5 312-1SJ11
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 312-2SJ12
1 unit
102
1.180
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 312-3SJ13
1 unit
102
1.180
3SE5 312-0SG1.
With escape release
from the back
with lock from the front
With emergency release -from the back

-and auxiliary release
-from the front
Yellow/Green
3SE5 312-0SJ1.
Magnetic field locks
--
24 DC
3SE5 312-0SB11
1 unit
102
1.030
--
115 AC
3SE5 312-0SB12
1 unit
102
1.030
--
230 AC
3SE5 312-0SB13
1 unit
102
1.030
Yellow/Green
24 DC
3SE5 312-1SB11
1 unit
102
1.040
Yellow/Green
115 AC
3SE5 312-2SB12
1 unit
102
1.040
Yellow/Green
230 AC
3SE5 312-3SB13
1 unit
102
1.040
3SE5 312-0SB1.
1)

13/99
Interlock Switches

Accessories
Version
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Actuators for 3SE5 1)

Standard actuators,
length 75.6 mm
3SE5 000-0AV01
1 unit
102
0.040
With vertical fixing,

length 53 mm
3SE5 000-0AV02
1 unit
102
0.070
With transverse fixing,

length 47 mm
3SE5 000-0AV03
1 unit
102
0.070
3SE5 000-0AV01
3SE5 000-0AV02
3SE5 000-0AV03
Radius actuators,
length 51 mm
3SE5 000-0AV04
Direction of approach from the left
3SE5 000-0AV04
1 unit
102
0.070
Direction of approach from the right
3SE5 000-0AV06
1 unit
102
0.070
Universal radius actuators,

length 77 mm
3SE5 000-0AV05
1 unit
102
0.090
Length 67 mm
3SE5 000-0AV07-1AK2
1 unit
102
0.120
Length 77 mm
3SE5 000-0AV07
1 unit
102
0.090
Protective caps made of black rubber for the

actuator head, to protect the actuator openings
from contamination
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA2
1 unit
102
0.010
Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator

head, for up to 8 padlocks
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA3
1 unit
102
0.065

for M20 1.5
For max. 250 V, 4 A
3SY3 127
1 unit
102
0.010
Cable boxes (4-pole), M12, non-adjustable

With terminal compartment, can be
pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CB45
1 unit
574
0.015

With terminal compartment, can be
pre-assembled
3RX8 000-0CC45
1 unit
574
0.015
Connector sockets (5-pole), M12

for M20 1.5
For max. 125 V, 4 A
3SY3 128
1 unit
102
0.010

3RX8 000-0CB55
1 unit
574
0.016

3RX8 000-0CC55
1 unit
574
0.016
Cable glands M20 1.5

Plastic
3SX9 926
1 unit
102
0.010
3SE5 000-0AV05
Universal radius actuators, heavy-duty
3SE5 000-0AV07
Optional accessories for 3SE5
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA2
3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA3
Connections for 3SE5, 3SE2
3SY3 127
3SX9 926
1)
3RX8 000
See pages 13/92 for dimensions drawings.
13/100
Product Category: POSW / SFTY

Interlock Switches

4 contacts Moving double-break contacts Degree of protection IP 67 Heavy duty Locking force 2000 N 1)2)
Tumbler/
Signaling equipment
Solenoid, Slow-action contacts/

rated
Ident. No. acc. to EN 50013
operating
voltage
Position monitor- Position monitoring of actuator
ing of solenoid
Mechanical lock, Solenoid unlock1)

Standard, with auxiliary release,
cover screw
List
Price $
1 unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
6 mm stroke
DC 24
Aux. key release
Order No.
3SE2 840-0XX00
0.885
AC 110
3SE2 842-0XX00
0.890
AC 230
3SE2 841-0XX00
0.875
DC 24
3SE2 840-0XX01
0.935
3SE2 842-0XX01
0.925
3SE2 841-0XX01
0.920
AC 110
AC 230
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Solenoid lock, Mechanical unlock1)

cover screw
DC 24
3SE2 830-0XX00
0.890
AC 110
3SE2 832-0XX00
0.855
AC 230
3SE2 831-0XX00
0.855
Mechanical lock, Solenoid unlock1)

cover screw
6 mm stroke
DC 24
Aux. release with lock
3SE2 840-6XX00
0.885
AC 110
3SE2 842-6XX00
0.880
AC 230
3SE2 841-6XX00
0.880
DC 24
3SE2 840-6XX01
0.965
AC 110
3SE2 842-6XX01
0.960
3SE2 841-6XX01
0.925
AC 230
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Solenoid lock, Mechanical unlock1)

cover screw
DC 24
3SE2 830-6XX00
0.885
AC 110
3SE2 832-6XX00
0.854
AC 230
3SE2 831-6XX00
0.849
6 mm stroke
Mechanical lock, solenoid unlock,

with optical signaling equipment1)
Standard, with auxiliary
release, cover screw
3SE2 840-1XX00
0.874
AC 110
DC 24
3SE2 842-1XX00
0.890
AC 230
3SE2 841-1XX00
0.870
DC 24
3SE2 840-1XX20
0.905
3SE2 842-1XX20
0.885
3SE2 841-1XX20
0.880
DC 24
3SE2 840-1XX32
0.945
AC 110
3SE2 842-1XX32
0.935
AC 230
3SE2 841-1XX32
0.930
DC 24
3SE2 830-1XX00
0.868
AC 110
3SE2 832-1XX00
0.854
AC 230
3SE2 831-1XX00
0.876
DC 24
3SE2 830-1XX20
0.881
AC 110
3SE2 832-1XX20
0.865
AC 230
3SE2 831-1XX20
0.875
79 mm
3SX3 197
0.035
- For approach from the left
132 mm
3SX3 207
0.045
- With transverse mounting
50 mm
3SX3 206
0.025
- W i t h v e r ti c a l m o un t i n g
50 mm
3SX3 306
0.025
Universal radius actuator
80 mm
3SX3 203
0.120

cover screw3)
AC 110
AC 230
Aux. key release3)
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
Mechanical lock, solenoid unlock1)

Standard
With optical switch indication3)
Length:
Actuator
Standard actuator
For operation, operating speed and travel, see page 13/104.

Appendix K

1) Supplied without actuator.

3) Contacts not electrically isolated.
13/101
Interlock Switches
3SE5 with solenoid locking

Schematics
3SE5
Monitoring the solenoid:
11 21
33
42 52 64
NSC0_00279a
12 22 34
41 51
63
NSC0_00349a
Monitoring the actuator:
Configuration
Contact blocks

to EN 50013
vmax

Nominal travel
Contact closed
Contact open
Actuator in actuator head: NC is closed
Separate actuators with solenoid interlocking

Lateral actuation
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 3..-.S...
12 22 34
90
< 2 mm
11 21
33
1,7 2,5
mm
2,4 **
Axial actuation
3SE5 3..-.S...
NSC0_00925
30
NSC0_00924
Axial and lateral actuation (4 90)
NSC0_00279a
Standard actuators
11-12 **
21-22 **
33-34
30
Ident. No. 12
< 2 mm
90
90
2,5
2,4
1,7
mm
**
** 11-12
21-22
** 33-34
90
NSC0_00892
Minimum force required in operating direction 30 N

(on retraction)
Radius actuators (all directions of approach)
Example: Direction of approach from the left
NSC0_00893
For connector socket assignment, see page 13/10.
13/102

Interlock Switches

Spring-actuated lock, with auxiliary release
3SE5 322-.SD2., 3SE5 322-.SG2., 3SE5 322-.SJ2.,
3SE5 312-.SD1., 3SE5 312-.SG1., 3SE5 312-.SJ1.,
Spring-actuated lock, with auxiliary release with lock

3SE5 322-.SE2.,
3SE5 312-.SE1.
39,1
2,9
39,1
2,9
32
30
40
19,3
33
19,3
33
25,1
25,1
32
18,9
30
40
5,3
18,9
5,3
31
21,5
NSC0_00771
21,5
40
54
16,3
43,8
94
5,5
31
Spring-actuated lock, with escape release

3SE5 322-.SF2.,
3SE5 312-.SF1.
40
54
16,3
43,8
5,5
87
Magnetic field lock

3SE5 322-.SB2.,
3SE5 312-.SB1.
39,1
2,9
39,1
2,9
32
18,9
30
40
135,3
5,3
5,5
16,3
43,8
31
94
NSC0_00774
21,5
NSC0_00773
21,5
40
54
18,9
M20x1,5
M20x1,5
31
159
30
31
5,3
135,3
159
30
40
19,3
33
19,3
33
25,1
25,1
32
NSC0_00772
M20x1,5
M20x1,5
31
135,3
159
30
135,3
159
62,1
40
54
5,5
16,3
43,8
The plastic enclosures have knock-out openings behind the

connecting thread; they are delivered therefore without
protective caps.
For actuators see page 13/92.

13/103
Interlock Switches

Metal enclosures
Operation, operating speed and travel
Actuator
Operation by a separate bar
Switch blocks
vmax
Internal circuit diagram

Terminal designations
acc. to EN 50 013
With tumbler
Lateral
actuation
(4 90)
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 83.-.XX.., 3SE2 84.-.XX..
Nominal travel
contact closed
contact open
Minimum
force required in direction of operation
Actuator in actuator head,

NC is closed
10 N
3SE2 8..-0XX..
3SE2 8..-1XX..
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE2..-6XX00
Ident. No. 02
vmax. = 1.5 m/s

max. locking force: 1820 N, duration 5 s 2)
1) Universal radius actuator (universal): Rmin > 70 mm.
2) If exceeded: Internal parts destroyed.
Dimension drawings
Metal enclosure, heavy duty
3SX3 197 actuator
for lengthwise fixing
3SX3 206 actuator

for transverse fixing
35.3
3SE2 83.-.XX, 3SE2 84-.XX, lateral actuation
M 20 x 1.5
3SX3 207 actuator for approach direction from the left side
Universal radius actuator 3SX3 203

9
13/104

Magnetic Monitoring Systems

General data
5,5
Overview
5,5
5
4
3
NSC
1
2
3
4
0_0
063
7a
Enabling range (example)
3SE6 806 safety relay

Switching magnets and switching elements
A magnetically operated switch is comprised of a coded switching magnet and a switching element (sensor unit). Evaluation requires a safety relay or connection to a bus system.
The 3SE6 806 safety relay has two floating enabling circuits
(safe circuits) as NO contact circuits and one floating signaling
circuit as a NC circuit. The number of enabling circuits can be
increased by adding one or more 3TK28 30 expansion modules.
Up to six protective devices (sensors) can be connected to the
safety relay. The device has six current-sourcing semiconductor
outputs (Y1 ... Y6), which report the state of the connected protective devices.
Application
SIRIUS 3SE6 magnetically operated switches are designed for
mounting on movable protective guards (covers, hinge
switches, doors, etc.). Evaluation can be performed by means of
a safety relay or through connection to a bus system.
The 3SE6 6 non-contact, magnetically operated safety switches
stand out due to their enclosed design with degree of protection
IP67. They are particularly suitable therefore for areas exposed
to contamination, cleaning or disinfecting.
A magnetic monitoring system comprises one or more magnetically operated switches and an evaluation unit, e. g. a safety relay. When contact blocks 1 NO + 1 NC are used the 3SE6 806
safety relay provides a high degree of protection against manipulation and can be installed in safety circuits up to Category 3 or
4 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1).
Combination of monitoring units and magnetically operated switches

Monitoring units
Magnetically operated switches

(switching elements + switching magnets)
1 NC + 1 NO
2 NC
3SE6 605-1BA 3SE6 605-2BA 3SE6 605-3BA 3SE6 604-2BA
Achievable category
(EN 954-1) /
performance level
(EN ISO 13849-1)
3SE6 704-1BA 3SE6 704-2BA 3SE6 704-3BA 3SE6 704-2BA

Relay outputs
SIRIUS safety relays,
6-fold
3SE6 806-2CD00
SIRIUS safety relays
3TK28 26
--
Cat. 3
Cat. 4 / e
Solid-state outputs
SIRIUS safety relays
3TK28 40
--
--
--
Cat. 3 / d
3TK28 41, 3TK28 42, 3TK28 45
--
--
--
Cat. 4 / e
SIRIUS safety relays with

contactor relay
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 52
--
--
--
Cat. 3 / d
3TK28 53
--
--
--
Cat. 4 / e
SIRIUS safe load feeders
3RA71 0.
--
--
--
Cat. 3
3RA71 1.
--
--
--
Cat. 4
--
--
--
Cat. 4
ASIsafe compact safety modules 3RK1 205, 3RK1 405

SIMATIC S7-31xF-2 DP or
SIMATIC ET 200M
SM 326 F, 24 DI, DC 24 V,
SM 326 F, 8 DI, NAMUR
Cat. 4
SIMATIC ET 200S PROFIsafe
4/8 F-DI / 3 F-DO, 24 V DC
Cat. 3
4/8 F-DI, 24 V DC
Cat. 4
SIMATIC ET 200eco
4/8 F-DI, 24 V DC
Cat. 4
SIMATIC ET 200pro
8/16 F-DI, 24 V DC,

4/8 F-DI / 4 F-DO 2 A, 24 V DC,
F-Switch
Cat. 4

13/105

General data
Magnet Switch Monitoring Unit
Magnet Switches
Type
3SE6 60.-1BA
3SE6 60.-2BA
Form
M30,
25 mm x 88 mm
Standards
DIN EN 50947-5-3 3)
Sensing type
Magnetic
Rated voltage
AC/DC 100 V, 120 V
DC 24 V
Rated power
(without signal outputs Y1 ... Y6)
Rated current
400 mA
100 mA
Maximum load current
Performance
10 VA/W
1W
Max. switching frequency
5 Hz
Signaling circuit Y1 ... Y6

Signaling circuit 31, 32
20 mA
2A
Max. sensing distance San ... Sab
5 ... 15 mm
4 ... 14 mm
Inputs
6 sensors (1 NO or 1 NC)
Housing material
Fiber-glass strengthened with glass fiber
Outputs
Degree of protection acc. to IEC

60529
IP67
6 signaling outputs
1 relay output
2 enabling circuits
3SE6 60.-3BA
25 mm x 33 mm
Type
3SE6 806-2CD00
Standards
EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088
Rated control supply voltage Uc
DC 24 V
Rated control supply voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us

3W
Response time
Permissible ambient temperature

Operating
Storage
25 to +70 C
25 to +70 C
Shock resistance
10 g/11ms
Vibration resistance
10 ... 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude

2
Automatic start
Manual start
150 ms typical
25 ms typical
Release time
20 ms max.
Recovery time
350 ms
Degree of protection to IEC 60529
IP20
Conductor
Cable LiYY 4 x 0.25 mm

3 m length
Receptacle, male
M12, M8
Release circuits (13, 14 and 23, 24)
Cable length (max for connecting

to monitoring unit)
1000 m
100 m
Continuous current, Ith
Switching capacity 1)
6A
Rated operational current, Ie 2)

AC-15 @ 203 V
DC-13
- 24 V
- 115 V
- 230 V
6A
6A
0.2 A
0.1 A
Short circuit protection

Fuse type
Duty class
- gL(gC)
- Quick response
DIAZED
6A
10 A
Permissible ambient temperature, Tu

Operating
Storage
1) Utilization category per DIN VDE

0660, Part 200, IEC 60947-5-1
2) With all release circuits loaded
13/106
25 to +45 C
25 to +70 C
3) In combination with monitoring unit

or AS-Interface.


3SE6

Design
Size
San ... Sab
mm
mm
Contacts
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
1 unit
kg
Round sensor unit. IP67

3SE6 704-1BA
3SE6 605-1BA
Switching
magnet
(coded)
M 30
3SE6 704-1BA
0.035
Switch block with M 30

3 m cable
5 to 15
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6 605-1BA
0.166
Switch block with M 30

M12, 4-pole
male
receptacle1)
5 to 15
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6 605-1BA02
0.130
3SE6 704-2BA
0.027
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6 605-2BA
0.165
2 NC
3SE6 604-2BA
0.165
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6 605-2BA01
0.040
2 NC
3SE6 604-2BA01
0.130
3SE6704-3BA
0.014
3SE6605-3BA
0.151
Rectangular sensor unit. IP67

3SE6 605-2BA,
3SE6 704-2BA
3SE6 605-3BA,
3SE6 704-3BA
Switching
magnet
(coded)
25 88
Switch block with 25 88

1 m cable
5 to 15
Switch block with 25 88

M8 male
receptacle
5 to 15
Switching
25 x 33
magnet (coded)
Switch block
with 3 m cable
25 x 33
4 to 14
1 NO + 1 NC
Spacer
for rectangular
sensor unit
25 88
3SX3 260
0.015
Spacer
for rectangular
sensor unit
25 33
3SX3 261
0.010
Rated control
supply voltage
Width
DC V
mm
Accessories
3SX3 260
3SX3 261
Enable circuits/ Max. number

signal. circuits of connectable
sensors
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
1 unit
kg
Monitoring units
3SE6 806-2CD00
24
2 NO / 1 NC
3SE6 806-2CD00
0.200
1 NO + 1 NC
1) Pin 1 (S21) + Pin 2 (S22) = Normally Closed; Pin 3 (S13) + Pin 4 (S14) = Normally Open
Typical 4-pole Female Plugs with black 5 meter cable include: 3RX1542 (right-angle) or 3RX1513 (straight plug).

13/107

General data
Dimension drawings
Round sensor units
Switch block 3SE6 605-1BA02
Coded switching magnet 3SE6 704-1BA
SW 36
M12x1
M30x1,5
36,2
31,6
5
1,5
48,2
NSC0_00664
Switch block 3SE6 605-1BA
Rectangular sensor units

Switch block
3SE6 60.-2BA0.
Switch block
3SE7 704-2BA
3SX3 260 spacer
1,5
3,5
25
4,5
NSC0_00669
78
88
0,5
13
Switching magnet without lead
Coded switching magnet

3SE6 704-3BA
3SX3 261 spacer
Monitoring unit
Magnet Switch Monitor 3SE6 806-2CD00
7,5
86
120
105
100
90
45
60
88
NSC0_00666
13/108


General data
Circuit diagrams
Connection example
Single Channel Control, Manual Start, Category 3 to EN ISO 13849-1
Six Channel Control. Automatic Start, Category 3 to EN ISO 13849-1
Terminal Assignments
Power
A1+, L+
A 2-, L S11, S12
S11, S22
S31, S32
S31, S42
S51, S52
S51, S62
Sensors
Sensors
(C o n t. )
Us
24 V D C
Channel 1, NC contact
Outputs
S73, S74
S83, S84
S93, S94
13, 14
23, 24
31, 32
Y1 to Y6
Channel 1+2, NO contact (parallel)

Release circuit 1 (safety NO contact)
Release circuit 2 (safety NO contact)
Floating signaling circuit
Status of Channels 1 through 6
3SE6 604-2BA magnetically operated switch on AS-Interface

Safety at Work, safe K45F or K60F compact module, Category 4
to EN ISO 13849-1
3SE6 604-2BA magnetically operated switch with 3TK28

safety relay, Category 4 to EN ISO 13849-1
L+
BU/S12
BK/S11
Switch block connection

A1
Y11 Y12 Y32
Y34
BK 11
WH 21
Y35 Y21 Y22
A2
14
24
12 BU
22 BN
NSC0_00640a
WH/S21
BN/S22
K1
K2
M
NSC0_00638a
The specified switching position refers to the basic position

when the cover, flap etc. is closed.

Abbrevitions for color designation of the connecting leads

acc. to IEC 60757:
BK = black
BL = blue
BN = brown
WH = white
13/109
Two-Hand Control
3SB38
Application
Two-hand operation consoles
are required for use with machines and systems that have
hazardous areas, in order to direct both hands of the operator
to one position.
Operation consoles are primarily

used on presses, stamping machines, printing presses and paper converting machines, in the
chemical industry and in the
rubber and plastics industries.
Specifications
Two-hand operation consoles
fulfill the requirements laid down
in DIN 24 980 and EN 574.
The plastic version can be retrofitted with up to 8 command

points, in line with the customers
requirements. The surface of the
console has premachined
breaking points for this purpose.
Installation
Construction
Equipment
All consoles are pre-equipped
with SIGNUM 3SB3 control devices. The metal version is also
available as an unequipped
empty enclosure.
The two-hand operation consoles can be mounted either on

the stand available or directly on
the machine by means of the
holes in the rear panel.
Principle of operation
The control command is given
by pressing the two operating elements simultaneously (within
0.5 s of each other) and must be

maintained for as long as a hazard exists.

Design
3SB38 63-4BB
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
1 unit
kg
SIGUARD two-hand operation console

Degree of protection IP 65, acc. to DIN 24 980 (EN 574),
Standard equipment with 2 black operating elements
(mushroom button 3SB30 00-1GA11, 40 mm, 1 NO + 1
NC) and a red EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button 3SB30
00-1HA20, latching 40 mm, 2 NC
Metal version
3SB39 010AQ
- with standard equipment
3SB38 63-4BB
4.800
- with standard equipment and 4 additional holes for control

devices 22.5 mm
3SB38 63-4BA
4.800
- empty enclosure, unequipped
3SB38 63-4BC
4.800
3SB38 63-1BB3
2.300
3SB39 01-0AQ3
4.500
Plastic version
- with standard equipment and predeterminated
breaking points for 8 further command points 22.5 mm
- with cable inlet holes for metric screwed cable glands
Stand for SIGUARD two-hand operation consoles
with cable inlet holes for metric screwed cable glands
Dimension drawings
3SB38 63-4 operator panel with metal enclosure
3SB39 01-0AQ stand

137
410
469
185
11,5
130
220
NSD0_01408
Note:
Also available with AS-Interface connection, contact your local Siemens
representative.
13/110

3SE5 / 3SE2 Hinge Switches

General data
Overview
Benefits
3SE5 hinge switches have the same enclosures as the standard

switches (modular system).
The 3SE5 hinge switches differ from the previous series through
the following new characteristics:
All actuators around the axis in increments of 22.5.
The new three-pole switching element 1 NO + 2 NC is available for all enclosure sizes.
The plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm has simple and
fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from
approx. 20 to 25 % of the time when connecting.
Application
The hinge switches are used in those areas where the position
of swiveling protective devices such as doors or flaps must be
monitored. With these switches, the position of the doors and
flaps is converted into electric signals. The switches allows shutdown and signaling without delay in the event of a small opening
angle through the snap-action contacts with an operating angle
of 10.
Design
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. Dimensions and fixing points of the enclosures are in
accordance with EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
Enclosure sizes
The devices are suitable for virtually any climate.
The 3SE5 switches are available as complete units in two enclosure sizes:
1 cable entry
1 cable entry
Standards
Hinge switches
Enclosure versions
IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1.

The protective measure of "total insulation" by the molded-plastic
enclosure is guaranteed by the use of molded-plastic screwglands.
Safety position switches
Various basic versions can be selected for the enclosures:

Available with two or three-pole switching elements designed
as snap-action contacts
For controls according to IEC 60204-1 or EN 60204-1 the devices can be used as a safety position switch. To secure position
switches against changes in their position, keyed techniques
must be employed on installation.
For a description of the basic switches see page 13/4.
Safety circuits
The standards IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1 require positive

opening of the NC contacts. Hence for the purposes of personal
safety, the assured opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to IEC 60947-5-1 with the
symbol q.
The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges. The

twist actuator is included in the scope of supply. There are two
versions:
Operating mechanism with hollow shaft, diameter inside
8 mm, outside 12 mm
Operating mechanism with solid shaft, diameter 10 mm

Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be attained with the 3SE5

hinge switches with q if the corresponding failsafe evaluation
units are selected and correctly installed, e. g. the 3TK28 safety
relays or matching devices from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or
SINUMERIK product ranges.
13/111
Hinge Switches

Complete units
Version
Snap-action
contacts
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm

according to EN 50047
With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 232-0HU21
1 unit
102
0.080
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 232-0LU21
1 unit
102
0.080
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5 232-0HU22
1 unit
102
0.110
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 232-0LU22
1 unit
102
0.120
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
With solid shaft

Accessories/spare parts
Version
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Actuator heads
With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
3SE5 000-0AU21
1 unit
102
0.030
3SE5 000-0AU22
1 unit
102
0.052
Actuator head with

hollow shaft
With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
Actuator head with

solid shaft
Note:
The respective actuator heads are included in the scope of
supply for the complete units.
13/112

Hinge Switches

Complete units
3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Snap-action
contacts
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Metal enclosures Enclosure width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041

With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 112-0LU21
1 unit
102
0.295
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5 112-0LU22
1 unit
102
0.315
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
With solid shaft

Version
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Actuator heads
With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
3SE5 000-0AU21
1 unit
102
0.030
3SE5 000-0AU22
1 unit
102
0.052
Actuator head with

hollow shaft
With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
Actuator head with

solid shaft
Note:
The respective actuator heads are included in the scope of
supply for the complete units.

13/113
Hinge Switches

with integrated hinge
Overview
Benefits
The 3SE2 283 hinge switches are particularly suitable for use in
doors and flaps of machines that must be closed to ensure the
safety of operating personnel. Their thin profile and compact design allow them to be directly mounted on a hinged protective
cover and the stable frame.
Easy mounting through use of versions with integrated hinge

Versions with small operating angle of 4
Protection against personal injury provided by positively
driven NC contacts according to IEC 60947-5-1
Simultaneous shutdown and reporting by 1 NO + 2 NC
contacts

3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry 2 (M20 1.5)
Version
Slow-action
contacts
DT Complete units
Order No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Plastic enclosures with integrated hinge

With mounted hinges
(delivered with additional
hinge and fixing
accessories)
Slow-action
contacts
Aluminum hinge
3SE2 283
- Operating angle 4
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 283-0GA43
1 unit
102
0.425
- Operating angle 4
3 NC
3SE2 283-6GA43
1 unit
102
0.425
- Operating angle 8
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 283-0GA53
1 unit
102
0.420
- Operating angle 8
3 NC
3SE2 283-6GA53
1 unit
102
0.420
- Operating angle 4
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 283-0GA44
1 unit
102
0.800
- Operating angle 4
3 NC
3SE2 283-6GA44
1 unit
102
0.800
High-grade steel hinge
Version
DT Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Additional hinges
(delivered with fixing accessories)
Made of aluminum
3SX3 225
1 unit
102
0.160
Made of high-grade steel
3SX3 231
1 unit
102
0.330
3SX3 225
13/114

Hinge Switches
3SE5, plastic and metal enclosures

Configuration
Contact blocks and operating travel of actuators
Contact blocks
Nominal travel
acc. to EN 50013
Contact blocks
Contact closed
Contact open
Hinge switches
3SE5 ...-0HU2.
22
21
NSC0_00918
NSC0_00767
13
1 NO + 2 NC
**
10
13-14
21-22 **
20
Ident. No. 11
3SE5 ..-0LU2.
14 32 22
13 31 21
NSC0_00919
NSC0_00768
1 NO + 1 NC
14
Nominal travel
acc. to EN 50013
**
10
13-14
21-22 **
31-32 **
20
Ident. No. 12
with hollow shaft
3SE5 232-0.U21
12
83,5
7
NSC0_00811
NSC0_00812
68
68
20
22
2,9
M3
50
12,5
13
15
M20x1,5
31
33
with hollow shaft
3SE5 112-0.U21
12
12,5
24
87,3
16,3
M20x1,5
NSC0_00813a
5,3
15,3
37,3
30
40,5
M20x1,5
NSC0_00814a
60
78
2
5,3
16,3
M3
2,9
60
78
51,6

33
with solid shaft
3SE5 122-0.U22
56,6
51,6
43,6
30
40,5
15
M20x1,5
12,5
24
31
10
13
12,5
20
22
24
4,3
24
4,3
52,8
47,8
39,8
10
with solid shaft
3SE5 232-0.U22
15,3
37,3
13/115
Hinge Switches

with integrated hinge
Overview
The hinge switches are used for monitoring and protecting

hinged protective devices such as doors and flaps.
250
2.5
At AC-15, 120 V
4.2
At AC-15, 250 V
At DC-13, 24 V
Type
Characteristics
Special design, with 2 M20 1.5 connecting thread
Degree of protection IP65
3 contacts
Operating angle of 4 or 8
3SE2 283
> 5 V/1 mA
Min. make-break capacity
Design
Short-circuit protection
Operational class gG
The 3SE2 283 hinge switch has an integrated electromechanical

contact block that is actuated when the hinged protective cover
is opened. If the cover is opened by 4 or 8, the NC contact is
positively opened by a direct (not spring-action) mechanism.
These positively driven contacts guarantee interruption of the
electric circuit and stopping of the machine. The NO contact is
closed when the cover is moved by 13.5.
> 1 106 operating cycles
Switching frequency
1200 operating cycles/hour
Positive opening
2 mm after opening point
Enclosure material
Plastic
IP65
C
Ambient temperature
25 ... +65
Shock resistance
30 g/18 ms
Resistance to vibrations
20 g /10 ... 200 Hz
Cable entry
2 (M20 1.5)
Screw terminals
0.5 ... 1.5 mm2/AWG 15
Configuration
Contact blocks and operating travel of actuators (operating angle 4)
Contact blocks
Nominal travel
acc. to EN 50013
Contact blocks
Contact closed
Contact open
Hinge switches
1 NO + 2 NC
Nominal travel
acc. to EN 50013
3SE2 283-0GA4.
0
NSC0_00614a
Ident. No. 12
3 NC
3SE2 283-6GA4.
13,5
11-12
21-22
33-34
13
NSC0_00615a
11-12
21-22
31-32
13,5
Ident. No. 03
3SE2 283-.GA.3 hinge switch with hinge
13/116
3SX3 225 additional hinge

Safety Relays
3TK28
General data
Overview
Benefits
General
Can be used for virtually all safety applications thanks to
compliance with the highest safety requirements (Category
4 according to EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508)
Suitable for use all over the world through compliance with all
globally established certifications
Compact, service-proven SIRIUS design creates more space
in the control cabinet
Flexible connectability and expendability make subsequent
changes easy
Removable terminals for greater plant availability
Yellow front plate clearly identifies the device as an item of
safety technology
Sensor cable up to 2000 m long enables use in large-scale
plants
SIRIUS safety relays are the key elements of a consistent and

cost-effective safety chain. Be it EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection, protective door monitoring or the protection of presses
or punches with SIRIUS safety relays every safety application
can be implemented to optimum effect in terms of engineering
and price.
SIRIUS safety relays provide numerous safety-related functions:
Monitoring the safety functions of sensors
Monitoring the sensor leads
Monitoring the correct operation of the safety relay
Monitoring the actuators (contactors) in the shutdown circuit
Safety-oriented disconnection when dangers arise
SIRIUS safety relays meet the highest requirements (Category 4)
according to EN 954-1 and achieve the highest safety integrity
level (SIL 3) according to IEC 61508.
Relay outputs
Different voltages can be switched through the floating
contacts
Higher currents can be switched with relay contacts
Solid-state outputs
Wear-free
Suitable for operation in fast switching applications
Insensitive to vibrations and dirt
Good electrical endurance
Microprocessor systems
Flexible use thanks to many different integrated functions
Easy parameterization using DIP switches on the front
High functional reliability based on extensive monitoring
functions
Operated by the machine control
Also connection of non-contact sensors (light arrays, light barriers etc.)
Application
SIRIUS safety relays are used mainly in autonomous safety applications which are not connected to a safety-oriented bus system. Their function here is to evaluate the sensors and the
safety-oriented shutdown of hazards. Also they check and monitor the sensors, actuators and safety-oriented functions of the
safety relay.

13/117
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 21
3TK28 22
3TK28 23
3TK28 24
3TK28 25
3TK28 26
Basic units
Basic units
Basic units
Basic units
Basic units
Basic units
24 V DC
Basic units
Wide voltage
range
Sensors
Input
Solid-state
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1)
With contacts
--
--
Monitored
--
--
Cascading input
24 V DC
--
--
--
--
--
Key-operated switches
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Stop category 0
3 NO
2 NO
2 NO
2 NO
3 NO
4 NO
4 NO
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Stop category 0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Safety mats
Start
Auto
---
Enabling circuit,
floating
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Signaling outputs
Floating
1 NC
--
--
--
2 NC
1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
--
--
--
--
--
--
2)
Solid-state
Category
acc. to EN 954-1 max
2)
SIL level max.

acc. to IEC 61508
--
--
Performance level PL
acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
---
--
--
--
--
Rated control supply

voltage
2 4 V DC
--
24 V AC/DC
2 4 V AC
--
--
--
--
115 V AC
--
--
--
--
--
230 V AC
--
--
--
--
--
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
--
--
--
--
--
--
= Available
-- = Not available
1)
The ON button is not monitored.
2)
Depending on the hazard assessment, additional measures may be necessary in the sensor circuit (e. g. protected laying).
13/118

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 26
3TK28 27
3TK28 28
3TK28 30
Basic units
24 V DC
Basic units
Wide voltage
range
Basic units
Basic units
Expansion units2) Two-hand control devices
3TK28 34
tv
tv
tv
tv
3TK28 35
Slowing down
test devices
Sensors
Input
Solid-state
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
With contacts
---
Safety mats
--
--
--
--
--
Start
Auto
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Monitored
Cascading input
24 V DC
--
--
Enabling circuit,
floating
Stop category 0
2 NO
2 NO
2 NO
2 NO
4 NO
2 NO+2 NC
3 NO+2 NC
Stop category 1
2 NO
2 NO
2 NO
2 NO
--
--
--
Stop category 0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
1 NC
1 NC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Signaling outputs
Floating
Solid-state
Category
1)
1)
As basic unit
3)
33)
As basic unit
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SIL level max.

acc. to IEC 61508
acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
--
24 V AC/DC
--
--
--
--
2 4 V AC
--
--
115 V AC
--
--
230 V AC
--
--
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
--

voltage
--
24 V DC
---
--
--
--
= Available
-- = Not available
1)
Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts, otherwise Category 3.
2)
For expansion of Siemens safety products.
3)
Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts, otherwise Category 2.

13/119
Safety Relays

Enabling
contacts
Signal. Achievable
contact category
s
Rated
control
supply voltage US
Width With screw terminals

mm
acc. to
EN 954-1
With spring loaded terminals
Order No.
List
Weight
Price $ approx.
Order No.
List
Weight
Price $ approx.
Preferred type
1 unit
kg
Preferred type
1 unit
kg
Basic units for EMERGENCY-STOP and protective doors2)

3TK28 21 to
Autostart
3TK28 24, screw 3 NO
terminals
2 NO
1 NC
B, 1, 2 3)
AC/DC 24 V
22.5
3TK28 21-1CB30
0.276
3TK28 21-2CB30
0.246
B, 1, 2, 3, 4
AC/DC 24 V
22.5
3TK28 22-1CB30
0.271
3TK28 22-2CB30
0.250
B, 1, 2, 3, 4
AC/DC 24 V
22.5
3TK28 23-1CB30
0.271
3TK28 23-2CB30
0.247
2 NO
B, 1, 2 3)
AC/DC 24 V
22.5
3TK28 24-1CB30
0.254
3TK28 24-2CB30
0.230
2 NO
B, 1, 2 3)
DC 24 V
22.5
3TK28 24-1BB40
0.249
3TK28 24-2BB40
0.228
2 NO
B, 1, 2 3)
AC 115 V
22.5
3TK28 24-1AJ20
0.294
3TK28 24-2AJ20
0.265
2 NO
B, 1, 2 3)
AC 230 V
22.5
3TK28 24-1AL20
0.288
3TK28 24-2AL20
0.270
Monitored start
2 NO
Autostart
3TK28 25,
screw terminals
Autostart/monitored start
3 NO
2 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4
DC 24 V
45
3TK28 25-1BB40
0.423
3TK28 25-2BB40
0.374
3 NO
2 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4
AC 24 V
45
3TK28 25-1AB20
0.421
3TK28 25-2AB20
0.375
3 NO
2 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4
AC 115 V
45
3TK28 25-1AJ20
0.519
3TK28 25-2AJ20
0.472
3 NO
2 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4
AC 230 V
45
3TK28 25-1AL20
0.516
3TK28 25-2AL20
0.475
DC 24 V
3TK28 26, spring Selectable parameters

loaded terminals
45
3TK28 26-1BB40
0.370
3TK28 26-2BB40
0.370
AC/DC 24 to 240 V 45
3TK28 26-1CW30
0.400
3TK28 26-2CW30
0.400
DC 24 V
45
3TK28 26-1BB41
0.370
3TK28 26-2BB41
0.370
AC/DC 24 to 240 V 45
3TK28 26-1CW31
0.400
3TK28 26-2CW31
0.400
DC 24 V
off-delay, tv 0.05 - 3 s
45
3TK28 26-1BB42
0.370
3TK28 26-2BB42
0.370
AC/DC 24 to 240 V 45
3TK28 26-1CW32
0.400
3TK28 26-2CW32
0.400
DC 24 V
45
3TK28 26-1BB44
0.370
3TK28 26-2BB44
0.370
AC/DC 24 to 240 V 45
3TK28 26-1CW34
0.400
3TK28 26-2CW34
0.400
off-delay, tv 5 - 300 s
3TK28 27 and
Monitored start
3TK28 28, screw 2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
terminals
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V
45
3TK28 27-1BB40
0.497
3TK28 27-2BB40
0.455
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V
45
3TK28 27-1AB20
0.496
3TK28 27-2AB20
0.454
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V
45
3TK28 27-1AJ20
0.650
3TK28 27-2AJ20
0.606
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V
45
3TK28 27-1AL20
0.650
3TK28 27-2AL20
0.604
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V
45
3TK28 27-1BB41
0.495
3TK28 27-2BB41
0.454
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V
45
3TK28 27-1AB21
0.499
3TK28 27-2AB21
0.454
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V
45
3TK28 27-1AJ21
0.650
3TK28 27-2AJ21
0.240
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V
45
3TK28 27-1AL21
0.650
3TK28 27-2AL21
0.605
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V
45
3TK28 28-1BB40
0.496
3TK28 28-2BB40
0.457
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V
45
3TK28 28-1AB20
0.500
3TK28 28-2AB20
0.468
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V
45
3TK28 28-1AJ20
0.650
3TK28 28-2AJ20
0.609
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V
45
3TK28 28-1AL20
0.650
3TK28 28-2AL20
0.612
Autostart
3TK28 21,
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
with spring
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
loaded terminals
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V
45
3TK28 28-1BB41
0.499
3TK28 28-2BB41
0.450
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V
45
3TK28 28-1AB21
0.501
3TK28 28-2AB21
0.545
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V
45
3TK28 28-1AJ21
0.657
3TK28 28-2AJ21
0.240
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC
B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V
45
3TK28 28-1AL21
0.650
3TK28 28-2AL21
0.608
Rated control supply voltages US DC 24 V and AC 50/60 Hz, 24, 115, 230 V
1) Only applicable to the instantaneous enabling contacts.
2) For dimension drawings see page 13/128.
13/120
3) These devices support attainment of category 3 in accordance with DIN EN

954-1. Depending on the hazardous assessment, additional measures in
the sensor circuit (e.g. protected routing) may be required.
Product Category: SFTY, Safety Relays

Safety Relays

Enabling
contacts 1)
Signal.
contacts
Achievable
category 2)
acc. to
EN 954-1
Rated
control
supply
voltage US
Width With screw terminals

mm
With spring loaded terminals
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
Order No.
List
Price $
Weight
approx.
Preferred type
1 unit
kg
Preferred type
1 unit
kg
Expansion units 4)
3TK28 30
To increase the number of contacts of the

safety relays
(for connecting to the basic unit,
1 enabling contact of the basic unit is required for
connection)
4 NO
3)
as basic unit
AC/DC 24 V 22.5
3TK28 30-1CB30
00.267
3TK28 30-2CB30
0.244
4 NO
3)
as basic unit
AC 115 V
22.5
3TK28 30-1AJ20
0.306
3TK28 30-2AJ20
0.276
4 NO
3)
as basic unit
AC 230 V
22.5
3TK28 30-1AL20
0.306
3TK28 30-2AL20
0.276
Press control units 4)

3TK28 34, 3TK28 For use in presses and stamping machines
35, screw
Two-hand control unit, two-channel
terminal
2 NO
2 NC
4
DC 24 V
45
3TK28 34-1BB40
0.432
3TK28 34-2BB40
0.383
2 NO
2 NC
AC 24 V
45
3TK28 34-1AB20
0.424
3TK28 34-2AB20
0.376
2 NO
2 NC
AC 115 V
45
3TK28 34-1AJ20
0.519
3TK28 34-2AJ20
0.472
2 NO
2 NC
AC 230 V
45
3TK28 34-1AL20
0.519
3TK28 34-2AL20
0.472
Rated control supply voltages US DC 24 V and AC 50/60 Hz, 24, 115, 230 V
Accessories
Order No.
List Price $
Weight
approx.
Preferred type
1 packing
kg
Packing
Sealable covers
to secure against unauthorized adjustment,
for 3TK28 27 and 3TK28 28 devices
3RP19 02
0.004
5 units
For 3TK28 26
3TK28 26-0DA00-0HA00
0.034
5 sets
3RP19 03
0.002
5 sets
Push-in lugs for screw mounting

for 3TK28 21 to 3TK28 57 (1 set = 2 units)
1) Enabling contacts are contacts of relevance to safety, which can also be

used for signalling purposes.
2) The maximum achievable category acc. to EN 954-1 is the category of the
basic unit. The category also depends on the external circuit, the command
device selected and their location on the machine. Compliance with the
standards and regulations for safety at the machine is essential.

3) Return circuit with NC contact 51 + 52.

4) For dimension drawings see page 13/128.
13/121
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 21
3TK28 22
3TK28 23
3TK28 24..B0.0
3TK28 24-.A.20 3TK28 25
General data
Standards
EN 60204-1, EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Test certificates
BG, SUVA, UL, CSA
Safety-oriented output contacts

Instantaneous FKrel
Time-delayed FKrel (tv)
3
--
Safety-oriented semiconductor outputs

Instantaneous FKel
Time-delay FKel (tv)
---
Signaling contacts MKrel
Semiconductor signaling outputs MKrel
--
Sensor inputs S
Cascading inputs KAS/BS
--

Enclosure
Terminals
IP40
IP20
Shock resistance sine wave
g/ms
2
--
3
--
--
8/10
Permissible mounting positions
Any
Touch protection
acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60900
Finger-safe
Height
mm
102: screw terminals; 104: spring-type terminals
Width
mm
22.5
Depth
mm
115
Weight
kg
0.240
Connection type
Terminal screw
S olid
AWG cables, solid or stranded
Tightening torque
0.460
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
M 3 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
0.8 1.2
Connection type
Spring-type terminals
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.0)
m m2
mm
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

10
Rated control supply voltage Us
24 AC/DC
115/230 AC
Operating range
AC operation
DC operation
V
V
0.85 ... 1.1 Us

0.85 ... 1.2 Us
0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us

-0.85 ... 1.1 Us
S olid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to
DIN 46228
Finely stranded
Stripped length
Electrical specifications
Measurement voltage
--
Response value Uresp
mV
--

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
-300

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
-4000
Rated power
1.5
Frequency ranges
Hz
50/60

(relay outputs) at
AC-15 at 115 V
AC-15 at 230 V
DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 115 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
A
A
A
5
5
5
0.2
0.1

(semiconductor outputs) at
DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
---
13/122
24/115/230 AC,
24 DC
6
6
6
0.2
0.1

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 21
3TK28 22
3TK28 23
3TK28 24..B0.0
3TK28 24-.A.20 3TK28 25
Electrical specifications (continued)

Operat- 105
ing
cycles
Operat- 107
ing
cycles
Switching frequency z
1/h
1000

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts
4 contacts
A
A
A
A
-----
Fusing for output contacts

Fuse links LV HRC Type 3NA,
DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE,
gL/gG operational class
gL/gG
Quick
A
A
6
10;
Signaling
circuit: 6
Maximum line resistance
30
Cable length from terminal to terminal

With Cu 1.5 mm2 and 150 nF/km
1000
ms
60
30
Make-time tE
For automatic start typ.
For automatic start max.
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
-AC: 300,
DC: 200
-----
Release time tR
For sensor typ.
For sensor max.
For mains failure typ.
For mains failure max.
ms
ms
ms
ms
-200
-200
Recovery time tW
After sensor
After mains failure
ms
s
Min. 200
Min. 200
Minimum command duration tB

Sensor input
ON button
Cascading input
ms
s
s
Min. 200
Min. 150
--
Simultaneity tG
ms
C
C
25 ... +60
40 ... +80
6
10
6
10;
Signaling circuit: 6
6
10
80
60
100
-125
---
-----
---30
-AC: 300,
DC: 200
-----
-20
-100
-20
-150
-200
-200
-25
-350
Min. 400
Min. 600
Min. 200
Min. 200
Min. 200
Min. 500
Min. 25
Min. 25
--
Min. 200
Min. 150
--
Times
Bridging of voltage dips, supply voltage
(only internal, no outputs)
For automatic start after mains failure typ.

For automatic start after mains failure max.
For monitored start typ.
For monitored start max.
Min. 25
Min. 40
--
-300
-150
-----
---25
Min. 300
Min. 300
--
Min. 25
Min. 25
--
Temperatures
During operation
During storage
Safety specifications
Safety integrity level SIL CL
acc. to IEC 61508
acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
Safety category CAT

acc. to EN 954-1
Type
acc. to EN 574
--
Probability of a dangerous failure

Per hour (PFHD)
On demand (PFD)
1 /h
2 x 10-7
--
Proof-test interval T1
20
--
---
2 x 10-7
--
3 x 10-8
--
Environmental data
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
Vibrations
acc. to EN 60068-2-6
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 .. 500
0.075
Climatic withstand capability
EN 60068-2-1, EN 60068-2-2, EN 60068-2-14, EN 60068-2-30
Clearances in air and creepage distances
EN 60947-1

13/123
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 26-.BB40 3TK28 26-.CW30 3TK28 26-.BB41 3TK28 26-.CW31 3TK28 27

3TK28 26-.BB42 3TK28 26-.CW32
3TK28 26-.BB44 3TK28 26-.CW44
General data
Standards
EN 60204-1, EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Test certificates
TV, UL, CSA

Instantaneous FKrel
4
--

Instantaneous FKel
---
BG, SUVA, UL CSA

2
2
--
Sensor inputs S

Enclosure
Terminals
IP40
IP20
g/ms
3
2
--
8/10
Any

Touch protection acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60900
Finger-safe
Height
mm
Width
mm
45
Depth
mm
116
Weight
kg
0.350
Connection type
Terminal screw
S olid
A W G c a b l e s , s o l i d o r s t ra nd e d
Tightening torque
--
115
0.580
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
0.8 1.2
Connection type
mm 2
mm2
mm 2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.0)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
10
24 DC
24 ... 240
AC/DC
24 DC
24 ... 240
AC/DC
24 DC,
24/115/230 AC
Operating rangec
AC operation
DC operation
-0.85 ... 1.2 Us
0.9 ... 1.1 Us

0.9 ... 1.1 Us
-0.85 ... 1.2 Us
0.9 ... 1.1 Us

0.9 ... 1.1 Us
0.85 ... 1.1 Us

0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Measurement voltage
--
mV
--

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
-300

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
-4000
Rated power
Frequency ranges
Hz
50/60

(relay outputs) at
AC-15 at 115 V
A
A
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
13/14, 23/24,
47/48, 57/58: 4
31/32, 61/62: 3
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
DC-13 at 24 V
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 2
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
63/64: 1
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 2, 63/64: 1
--
AC-15 at 230 V
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
13/14, 23/24,
33/34, 43/44: 4
51/52: 3
13/14, 23/24,
47/48, 57/58: 4
31/32, 61/62: 2
DC-13 at 115 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
13/14, 23/24,
47/48, 57/58: 4
31/32, 61/62: 2
73/74: 1
0.2
0.1

DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
64, 75: 0.5

--
---
74, 84: 0.5

--
---
S olid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228
Finely stranded
Stripped length
mm
13/124
13/14, 23/24,
47/48, 57/58: 4
31/32, 61/62: 3
73/74: 1
13/14, 23/24: 5
47/48, 57/58: 2
0.2
0.1
---

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 26-.BB40 3TK28 26-.CW30 3TK28 26-.BB41 3TK28 26-.CW31 3TK28 27

3TK28 26-.BB42 3TK28 26-.CW32
3TK28 26-.BB44 3TK28 26-.CW44

Oper.
cycles
--
Oper.
cycles
107
105
1/h
2000
1000
Summation current max. 12

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts
4 contacts
A
A
A
A
4
4
4
3

Fuse links LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB,
NEOZED Type 5SE, gL/gG operational class
gL/gG
Quick
6 (control
voltage: 2)
10
1000
30

2000
1000
ms
Min. 10
30
ms
ms
ms
50 + debounce time
50 + debounce time
Approx. 8000 starting time
--Approx. 8000
starting time
Approx. 8000
starting time
-80
Times
Make-time tE
ms
Approx. 8000 starting time

ms
ms
50 + debounce time
50 + debounce time
Release time tR
For sensor typ.
For sensor max.
ms
ms
ms
ms
50 + deb. time
-75
125
Recovery time tW
After sensor
ms
After mains failure

Sensor input
ON button
Cascading input
Simultaneity tG
50 + deb. time
--300
-50+ deb. time

75
125
-50+ deb. time

-320
- 30 adjustable
-100
Min. 250
Min. 250
Min. 250
Min. 200
Min. 600
Min. 200
After time has

elapsed
Min. 200
ms
s
s
30
0.2 ... 5
--
ms
C
C
25 ... +60
40 ... +80
Min. 25
Min. 25
--
Temperatures
During operation
During storage
acc. to IEC 61508
Stop cat. 0: 3
Stop cat. 1: 2
Performance level PL acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
Safety category CAT

acc. to EN 954-1
Stop cat. 0: 4
Stop cat. 1: 3
Type acc. to EN 574
--

Per hour (PFHD)
1/h
On demand (PFD)
7.8 x 10-9
7.8 x 10-9
7.8 x 10-9
7.8 x 10-9
--
--
--
--
Stop cat. 0: 3 x 10-8

Stop cat. 1: 2 x 10-7
--
20
Environmental data
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
Vibrations acc. to EN 60068-2-6
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 .. 500
0.075
EN 60068-2-1, EN 60068-2-2, EN 60068-2-14, EN 60068-2-30
EN 60947-1
1)
Time-delayed enabling circuit: 300 ms adjustable.

13/125
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 28
3TK28 30
3TK28 34
3TK28 35
General data
Standards
EN 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN 954-1,
IEC 61508
Test certificates
BG, SUVA, UL, CSA, TV

Instantaneous FKrel
2
2

Instantaneous FKel
---
--
Sensor inputs S
--

Enclosure
Terminals
IP40
IP20
g/ms
EN 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN 954-1,
IEC 61508,
EN 574
4
--
--
2
--
4
--
--
IP20
IP20
8/10
Any
Touch protection
acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60900
Finger-safe
Height
mm
106 (3TK28 30: 102): screw terminals; 108 (3TK28 30: 104): spring-type terminals
Width
mm
45
Depth
mm
115
Weight
kg
0.580
Connection type
Terminal screw
S olid
A W G c a b le s , s o l id o r s t r a nd e d
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
0.260
0.450
0.500

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
0.8 1.2
mm2
mm2
m m2
mm
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.0)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
10
24 DC, 24/115/230 AC
Operating range
AC operation
DC operation
V
V
0.85 ... 1.1 Us

0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Measurement voltage
--
mV
--

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
-300

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
-4000
S olid
Finely stranded
Stripped length
45
Screw terminals
Connection type
22.5
Rated power
Frequency ranges
Hz
50/60

(relay outputs) at
AC-15 at 115 V
AC-15 at 230 V
A
A
DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 115 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
-13/14, 23/24: 5
47/48, 57/58: 3
13/14, 23/24: 5
47/48, 57/58: 2
0.2
0.1

DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
---
13/126
0.85 ... 1.1 Us

0.85 ... 1.2 Us
0.85 ... 1.1 Us

0.85 ... 1.1 Us
-5
-5
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
-23/24, 33/34, 41/42: 5

13/14: 3
23/24, 33/34, 41/42: 5
13/14: 2
0.2
0.1

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 28
3TK28 30
3TK28 34
3TK28 35

Oper.
cycles
105
Oper.
cycles
107
1/h
1000

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts
4 contacts
A
A
A
A
-----

gL/gG
Quick
A
A
6, control voltage: 2
10
30

1000
3TK28 30-.CB30:1000 1000

3TK28 30-.AJ20: 300
3TK28 30-.AL20: 80
ms
30
3TK28 30-.CB30:10
3TK28 30-.A.20: 35
40
Make-time tE
ms
ms
-80
-100
-50

ms
ms
---
---
---

ms
ms
---
-3TK28 30-.CB30: 30
3TK28 30-.A.20: 200
-3TK28 30-.CB30: 30
3TK28 30-.A.20: 200
---
---
---
Release time tR
For sensor typ.
For sensor max.
ms
ms
ms
ms
-Up to 30 adjustable
-100
---3TK28 30-.CB20: 25
3TK28 30-.A.20: 80
-20
---
-50
---
Recovery time tW
After sensor
ms
Min. 250
Min. 250
After time has

elapsed
Min. 1
--
After mains failure
3TK28 30-.CB20: 50
3TK28 30-.A.20: 120
--
--

Sensor input
ON button
Cascading input
ms
s
s
Min. 25
Min. 25
--
----
Simultaneity tG
ms
C
C
25 ... +60
40 ... +80
3
--
6
10
6, control voltage: 2
10
---
Times
Temperatures
During operation
During storage
acc. to IEC 61508
Stop cat. 0: 3
Stop cat. 1: 2
acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
Safety category CAT

acc. to EN 954-1
Stop cat. 0: 4
Stop cat. 1: 3
As basic unit
As basic unit
Type
acc. to EN 574
--
--
III C
As basic unit
1 /h
Stop cat. 0: 3 x 10-8

Stop cat. 1: 2 x 10-7
--
3 x 10-8
3 x 10-8
--
--
20

Per hour (PFHD)
On demand (PFD)
Environmental data
EN 60947-5-1
EMC
Vibrations
acc. to EN 60068-2-6
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 .. 500
0.075
EN 60068-2-1, EN 60068-2-2, EN 60068-2-14, EN 60068-2-30
EN 60947-1

13/127
Safety Relays

Dimension drawings 1)
3TK28 safety relays with screw terminals
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30
3TK28 25 up to 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
3TK28 safety relays with Spring Loaded terminals

3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30
3TK28 25 up to 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
1) For 35 mm standard rail to EN 50 022.
13/128
2) Dimension for screw mounting. Screw mounting with 2 plug-in tabs 3RP19
03 per 3TK28 unit.

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 40 3TK28 41 3TK28 42 3TK28 45

Basic units Basic units Basic units Multifunction
units
"automatic
and
monitored
start"
tv
Multifunction
units
"automatic
and
monitored
start"
Multifunction
units
"monitored
start"
tv
Multifunction
units
"monitored
start"
Multifunction
units
OK button
tv
Multifunction
units
OK button
Multifunction
units
"springtype interlocking"
Multifunction
units
"solenoid
interlocking"
tv
tv
tv
Sensors
Input
Solid-state
--
--
--
--
--
With contacts
Safety mats
--
Start
Auto
--
--
--
--
Monitored
Cascading input
24 V DC
--
--
--
--
Enabling circuit, floating

Stop category 0
--
--
--
2 NO
1 NO
2 NO
1 NO
2 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
1 NO
--
1 NO
--
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Stop category 0
21)
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
--
Signaling outputs
Floating
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Solid-state
--
--
--
Category
SIL level max.

acc. to IEC 61508
acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
--
--

voltage
24 V DC
= Available
-- = Not available
1)
The outputs are only safe when an external contactor is used.

13/129
Safety Relays

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
DT
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Screw terminals
Order No.
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Rated control supply voltage Us 24 V DC

3TK28 40 basic units
24 D C
--
3TK28 40-1BB40
1 unit
102
0.180
--
3TK28 41-1BB40
1 unit
102
0.166
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
A
A
A
3TK28 42-1BB41
3TK28 42-1BB42
3TK28 42-1BB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.168
0.166
0.166
3TK28 45-1HB40
1 unit
102
0.350
A
A
A
3TK28 45-1HB41
3TK28 45-1HB42
3TK28 45-1HB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
3TK28 45-1DB40
1 unit
102
0.350
A
A
A
3TK28 45-1DB41
3TK28 45-1DB42
3TK28 45-1DB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
3TK28 45-1EB40
1 unit
102
0.350
A
A
A
3TK28 45-1EB41
3TK28 45-1EB42
3TK28 45-1EB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
A
A
A
3TK28 45-1FB41
3TK28 45-1FB42
3TK28 45-1FB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
A
A
A
3TK28 45-1GB41
3TK28 45-1GB42
3TK28 45-1GB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350

24 D C
3TK28 41-1BB40
3TK28 42 basic units tv

24 DC
3TK28 45 multi-function units "automatic and

monitored start"
24 D C
3TK28 42-1BB41
--
3TK28 45 multi-function units tv

"automatic and monitored start"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
3TK28 45 multi-function units

"monitored start"
24 D C
3TK28 45-1HB40
--

"monitored start"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"OK button"
24 D C
--
3TK28 45-1HB41
"OK button"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"spring-type interlocking"
3TK28 45-1DB40
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"solenoid interlocking"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
3TK28 45-1DB41
13/130

Safety Relays

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
DT
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Spring-type
terminals
Order No.
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Rated control supply voltage Us 24 V DC

24 DC
--
3TK28 40-2BB40
1 unit
102
0.150
--
3TK28 41-2BB40
1 unit
102
0.143
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
B
A
B
3TK28 42-2BB41
3TK28 42-2BB42
3TK28 42-2BB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.143
0.146
0.149
3TK28 45-2HB40
1 unit
102
0.350
B
B
B
3TK28 45-2HB41
3TK28 45-2HB42
3TK28 45-2HB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
3TK28 45-2DB40
1 unit
102
0.350
B
B
B
3TK28 45-2DB41
3TK28 45-2DB42
3TK28 45-2DB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
3TK28 45-2EB40
1 unit
102
0.350
B
B
B
3TK28 45-2EB41
3TK28 45-2EB42
3TK28 45-2EB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
B
B
B
3TK28 45-2FB41
3TK28 45-2FB42
3TK28 45-2FB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350
B
B
B
3TK28 45-2GB41
3TK28 45-2GB42
3TK28 45-2GB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.350
0.350
0.350

24 DC
3TK28 42 basic units tv
3TK28 45-2DB40
24 DC

24 DC
3TK28 45-2DB41
--

24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"monitored start"
24 DC
--

"monitored start"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"OK button"
24 DC
--

"OK button"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"spring-type interlocking"
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300

"solenoid interlocking"
24 DC

0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
13/131
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 40
3TK28 41
Standards
EN 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN 954-1,
IEC 61508
EN 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN 954-1,
IEC 61508
EN 50156-1
Test certificates
TV, UL, CSA

Instantaneous FKrel
---

Instantaneous FKel
2
--
--
--
Sensor inputs S
--

Enclosure
Terminals
IP40
IP20
3TK28 42
3TK28 45-..B40
3TK28 45-..B41
3TK28 45-..B42
3TK28 45-..B44
General data
g/ms
EN 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN 954-1,
IEC 61508
1
1
2
--
1
1
2
--
1
1
1
2
1
8/10 and 15/5
Any
Touch protection
acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60900
Finger-safe
Height
mm
102: Screw terminals; 104: Spring-type terminals
Width
mm
22.5
45
Depth
mm
86
120
Weight
kg
0.180
Connection type
Terminal screw
S ol i d
A W G c a b l e s , s o l i d o r s t r a nd e d
Tightening torque
0.400
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
0.8 1.2
Connection type
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
m m2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
24 DC
Operating range
D C o p e ra t i o n
0.9 ... 1.15 Us
0.85 ... 1.15 Us

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
50
50
50
50/300

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
500
500
500
500/4000
Rated power at Us
1.5
Frequency ranges
Hz
--
Rated operational current Ie (relay outputs) at

AC-15 at 115 V
AC-15 at 230 V
DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 115 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
A
A
A
------
S olid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to
DIN 46228
Finely stranded
Rated operational current Ie (semiconductor outputs) at

DC-13 at 115 V
A
DC-13 at 230 V
A
0.5
--
Operat- Unlimited
ing
cycles
Operat- -ing
cycles
1/h
13/132
1.3
2.5
-3
1
-0.1
1.5
--
0.5
--
105
2000

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 40
3TK28 41
3TK28 42
3TK28 45-..B40
3TK28 45-..B41
3TK28 45-..B42
3TK28 45-..B44

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts
4 contacts
-A
A
A
A

gL/gG
Quick
-----
Not required
Not required
250

2000
ms
25
Make-time tE
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
80
100
350
500
60
100
60
100
6000
7000
60
100
Release time tR
For sensor typ.
For sensor max.
ms
ms
20
30
45
60

ms
ms
0
0
0
0
Recovery time tW
After sensor
After mains failure
ms
s
120
0.5
400
Max. 7

Sensor input
ON button input
Cascading input
ms
ms
ms
5
60
5
45
200 ... 5000
45
Simultaneity tG
ms
C
C
25 ... +60
40 ... +80
1000
1000
Times
(only internal, no outputs) (only internal, no outputs)
60
100
--60
100
-0.05 ... 300
Adjustable
0
0
45
-25
30
-0.05 ... 300

Adjustable
25
30
400
Max. 8
Temperatures
During operation
During storage
acc. to IEC 61508
acc. to ISO 13849-1
--
Safety category CAT

acc. to EN 954-1
Type
acc. to EN 574
--

Per hour (PFHD)
On demand (PFD)
1/h
1.05 x 10-8
--
10
3
e
4
5.36 x 10-11
--
6.86 x 10-9
-20
Environmental data
EN 60947-5-1,
EN 61000-6-2,
EN 61000-6-4
EMC
Vibrations
acc. to EN 60068-2-6
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 ... 500
0.075
EN 60068-2-78
EN 60947-1

IEC 60947-5-1,
IEC 60000-4-3,
IEC 60000-4-5,
IEC 60000-4-6
13/133
Safety Relays

3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42 with screw terminals
3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42 with spring-type terminals
2,5
NSC0_00677b
1)
15
22,5
1)
36
65
15
22,5
86
86
3TK28 45 with spring-type terminals
3TK28 45 with screw terminals
3
7
7
NSC0_00673b
1)
37
45
84
108
102
102
83
106
75
98
118
139
NSC0_00672b
68
91
118
139
84
94
104
74
75
94
110
120
83
92
102
74
68
87
110
120
NSC0_00678b
1)
65
94
115
37
45
115
1) For standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 60715.
13/134

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 50
3TK28 51
3TK28 52
3TK28 53
3TK28 56
3TK28 57
Basic units
Basic units
Basic units
Basic units
Expansion units1)
Expansion units1)
tv
Sensors
Input
Solid-state
With contacts
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Safety mats
--
--
Start
Auto
Monitored
--
--
--
--
--
Cascading input
24 V DC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Stop category 0
3 NO
2 NO
6 NO
3 NO
6 NO
--
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
--
3 NO
Stop category 0
--
--
--
Stop category 1
--
--
--
--
--
--
Floating
--
1 NC
1 NC
--
1 NC
--
Solid-state
--
--
--
--
--
--
Category
Corresponds to
basic unit
Corresponds to
basic unit
SIL level max.

acc. to IEC 61508
--
--
--
acc. to ISO 3849-1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Enabling circuit, floating
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Signaling outputs

voltage
24 V DC
24 V AC/DC
--
--
--
--
24 V AC
--
--
--
--
115 V AC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
230 V AC
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
--
--
--
Rated operational
voltage
24 V DC
230 V AC
600 V AC
Switching capacity
AC-15 at U = 230 V
DC-13 at U = 24 V
= Available
-- = Not available
1)
For expansion of Siemens safety products.

13/135
Safety Relays

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
DT
Order No.
V
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Screw terminals
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Rated control supply voltages Us

24 V DC and 50/60 Hz, 115, 230 V AC
24 DC
115 AC
230 AC
--
A
B
B
3TK28 50-1BB40
3TK28 50-1AJ20
3TK28 50-1AL20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.819
0.765
0.770
--
B
B
B
3TK28 51-1BB40
3TK28 51-1AJ20
3TK28 51-1AL20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.821
0.770
0.767
--
A
B
3TK28 52-1BB40
3TK28 52-1AL20
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
0.919
0.870
--
3TK28 53-1BB40
1 unit
102
0.714
3TK28 56-1BB40
1 unit
102
0.785
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.682
0.679
0.684

24 D C
115 AC
230 AC
24 D C
230 AC
24 D C
3TK28 56 expansion units

24 D C
--
3TK28 57 expansion units tv

24 DC
24 DC
24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
A
B
B
3TK28 57-1BB41
3TK28 57-1BB42
3TK28 57-1BB44

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
DT
Spring-type
terminals
Order No.
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

24 V DC and 50/60 Hz, 115, 230 V AC
24 DC
115 AC
230 AC
--
B
B
B
3TK28 50-2BB40
3TK28 50-2AJ20
3TK28 50-2AL20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.820
0.650
0.761
--
B
B
B
3TK28 51-2BB40
3TK28 51-2AJ20
3TK28 51-2AL20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.650
0.650
0.768
--
B
B
3TK28 52-2BB40
3TK28 52-2AL20
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
0.935
0.878
--
3TK28 53-2BB40
1 unit
102
0.705
3TK28 56-2BB40
1 unit
102
0.750
B
B
B
3TK28 57-2BB41
3TK28 57-2BB42
3TK28 57-2BB44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.650
0.677
0.684
DT
Order No.

3TK28 50-2BB40
24 D C
115 AC
230 AC
24 D C
230 AC
3TK28 51-2BB40
24 D C
3TK28 56 expansion units

24 D C
--
3TK28 57 expansion units tv

24 DC
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
3TK28 52-2BB40
Accessories
Version
List
Price $
per PU
PS*
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Screwdrivers
Screwdrivers
With screwdriver blades 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm
Long, green
8WA2 803
1 unit
041
0,024
Long, green, partially insulated
8WA2 880
1 unit
041
0,034
8WA2 803
13/136

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 50
3TK28 51
3TK28 52
3TK28 53
3TK28 53-0AB1 3TK28 56
3TK28 57
6
--
3
--
--
General data
Standards
EN 60204-1, EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Test certificates
TV, UL, CSA

Instantaneous FKrel
3
--

Instantaneous FKel
---
--
--
Sensor inputs S
--

Enclosure
Terminals
IP20
IP20
g/ms
2
--
--
5/11
8/10 and 15/5
Touch protection
acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60900
Finger-safe
Height
mm
89
Width
mm
90
Depth
mm
112
Weight
kg
0.850
Connection type
150
112
150
112
0.750
Screw terminals
mm 2
mm2
AWG
Nm

1 x (0.2 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.2 ... 1.0)
1 x (0.25 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.25 ... 1.0)
2 x (24 ... 12)
0.8 1.2
Connection type
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.2 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
mm 2
mm
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

10
24 DC, 24/115/230 AC
Measurement voltage
--
--
Operating range
AC operation
DC operation
V
V
0.9 ... 1.15 Us

0.85 ... 1.1 Us

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
50
690

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
500
6000
Rated power at Us
8.5
Frequency ranges
Hz
50/60

(relay outputs) at
AC-15 at 115 V
AC-15 at 230 V
DC-13 at 24 V
A
A
A
-6
10
DC-13 at 115 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
---

DC-15 at 24 V
DC-15 at 230 V
A
A
---
S olid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves
acc. to DIN 46228
Finely stranded
Stripped length
--
Any
Terminal screw
S olid
AWG cables, solid or stranded
Tightening torque
3
-1
--
6
--

24 DC
-0.85 ... 1.1 Us
--
-6
10,
Auxiliary
switch
blocks: 6
---
--10
---
--10,
Auxiliary
switch
blocks: 6
---
13/137
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 50
3TK28 51
3TK28 52
3TK28 53
3TK28 53-0AB1 3TK28 56
3TK28 57

Operat- See "3RH1 Characteristic Curves"

ing
cycles
Operat- 3 x 107
ing
cycles
103
--

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts
4 contacts
A
A
A
A
-----

Fuse links LV HRC Type 3NA,
DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG
Quick
A
A
10
--
250

2000
ms
Make-time tE
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
100
200
350
500
60
100
60
100
6000
7000
60
100
Release time tR
For sensor typ.
For sensor max.
ms
ms
30
50
50
60

ms
ms
100
120
120
120
Recovery time tW
After sensor
After mains failure
ms
s
20
0.02
500
7

Sensor input
ON button
Cascading input
ms
s
ms
20
20
20
45
0.2 ... 5
45
Simultaneity tG
ms
C
C
25 ... +60
40 ... +80
500
Times
--6000
7000
---300
adjustable
120
120
--45
Temperatures
During operation
During storage
acc. to IEC 61508
--
Safety category CAT acc. to EN 954-1
Type acc. to EN 574
--

Per hour (PFHD)
On demand (PFD)
1/h
1 /h
--
1.52 x 10-8
--
10
--
As basic unit
5 x 10-11
--
9.8 x 10-11
--
Environmental data
IEC 60947-5-1,
IEC 60000-4-3,
IEC 60000-4-5,
IEC 60000-4-6
EMC
Vibrations acc. to EN 60068-2-6

Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 ... 500
0.075
EN 60068-2-78
EN 60947-1
13/138

Safety Relays

3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57
with screw terminals
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57

with spring-type terminals
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with screw terminals

38
26
122 x 68
102 x 68
93
132
44
1)
NSC 00505
90
40
91
108
146
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with spring-type terminals
1)
For standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 60715.

13/139
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 10
Standstill monitors
Sensors
Inputs
Solid-state
With contacts
Without sensors (measuring inputs)
--
Safety mats
--
Start
Auto
Monitored
--
Cascading input
24 V DC
--
--
-3
Enabling circuit,
floating
Stop category 0
3 NO + 1 NC
Stop category 1
--
Enabling circuit,
solid-state
Stop category 0
--
Stop category 1
--
Signaling outputs
Floating
1 CO
Solid-state
Category
SIL level max.

acc. to IEC 61508
acc. to ISO 13849-1

voltage
24 V DC
230 V AC
400 V AC
= Available
-- = Not available
13/140

Safety Relays

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
DT
Order No.
V
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Screw terminals
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

24 V DC and 50/60 Hz, 230, 400 V AC
3TK28 10 standstill monitors
24 DC
230 AC
400 AC
0.2 ... 6
A
A
A
3TK28 10-0BA01
3TK28 10-0GA01
3TK28 10-0JA01

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
DT
Spring-type
terminals
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.500
0.500
0.500
3TK28 10-0BA01
Order No.
V
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg

24 V DC and 50/60 Hz, 230, 400 V AC
3TK28 10 standstill monitors
24 DC
230 AC
400 AC
0.2 ... 6
A
A
A
3TK28 10-0BA02
3TK28 10-0GA02
3TK28 10-0JA02
DT
Order No.
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
102
102
102
0.500
0.500
0.500
3TK28 10-0GA02
Accessories
Version
List
Price $
per PU
PS*
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Push-in lugs
}
3RP19 03
1 10 units
101
0.002
Long, green
8WA2 803
1 unit
041
0.024
Long, green, partially insulated
8WA2 880
1 unit
041
0.034
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing,
2 units are required for each device
3RP19 03
Screwdrivers
Screwdrivers
With screwdriver blades 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm
8WA2 803

13/141
Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 10
General data
Standards
EN 60204-1, EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508
Test certificates
TV, UL, CSA

Instantaneous FKrel
4
--

Instantaneous FKel
---
Sensor inputs S
--

Enclosure
Terminals
IP40
IP20
g/ms
8/10
Any
Touch protection
acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60900
Finger-safe
Height
mm
Width
mm
45
Depth
mm
116
Weight
kg
0.500
Connection type
Terminal screw
S olid
A W G c a b l e s , s o li d o r s t ra n d e d
Tightening torque
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
0.8 1.2
Connection type
mm2
mm2
mm 2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.0)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
24 DC, 230/400 AC
Operating range
AC operation
DC operation
V
V
0.8 ... 1.1 Us

0.9 ... 1.15 Us
S olid
Finely stranded
Measurement voltage
Max. 690
20 ... 400 adjustable

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
300
690

For control circuit
For outputs
V
V
6/4
6
Rated power at Us
Frequency ranges
Hz
50/60
Rated operational current Ie (relay outputs) at

AC-15 at 115 V
AC-15 at 230 V
DC-13 at 24 V
DC-13 at 115 V
DC-13 at 230 V
A
A
A
A
A
-3 (NO contacts); 2 (NC contacts)

2
---
Rated operational current Ie (semiconductor outputs) at

DC-13 at 115 V
A
DC-13 at 230 V
A
0.1
--
Operat- 2 x 105
ing
cycles
Operat- 5 x 107
ing
cycles
1/h
13/142
1200

Safety Relays

Type
3TK28 10

5, summation current max. 8

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts
4 contacts
A
A
A
A
5
5
5
--

gL/gG
Quick
-5
--

--
Release time tR
For sensor typ.
For sensor max.
ms
ms
ms
ms
-6 adjustable
---
Simultaneity tG
ms
C
C
25 ... +60
40 ... +75
Times
Temperatures
During operation
During storage
acc. to IEC 61508
acc. to ISO 13849-1
Safety category CAT

acc. to EN 954-1

Per hour (PFHD)
On demand (PFD)
1/h
1.49 x 10-9
--
20
3TK28 10
with screw terminals
3
7
7
NSC0_00673b
1)
37
45
1)
84
108
102
75
98
118
139
83
106
102
NSC0_00672b
68
91
118
139
3TK28 10
with spring-type terminals
1)
65
94
115
37
45
115

13/143

General data
Overview
Benefits
More functionality and flexibility through freely configurable
safety logic
For all safety applications thanks to compliance with the highest safety requirements (Category 4 according to EN 954-1,
Performance Level e according to ISO 13849-1 or SIL3 according to IEC 62061)
Suitable for use all over the world through compliance with all
globally established certifications
Modular hardware configuration
Parameterization by means of software instead of wiring
Removable terminals for greater plant availability
Communication
The 3RK3 modular safety system can be connected to
PROFIBUS through the DP interface and exchange data with
higher-level control systems.
The 3RK3 modular safety system (MSS) is a freely parameterizable modular safety relay. Depending on the type of external
connection, safety-orientated applications up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1, Performance Level e according to
ISO 13849-1 and SIL3 according to IEC 62061 can be realized.
The modular safety relay permits several safety applications to
be interconnected. The safety functions are easily created on the
PC using a graphic parameterizing tool. For example, disconnection ranges can be set and other dependencies defined.
With additional safety-oriented expansion modules the system is
flexibly adapted to the required safety applications.
The MSS comprises the following system components:
Central module
Expansion modules
Interface module
Parameterization software
Accessories
The comprehensive error and status diagnostics provides the
possibility of finding errors in the system and localizing signals
from sensors. Plant downtimes can be reduced as the result.
The MSS supports among other things:

Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s
Automatic baud rate detection
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
Exchange of 32-bit cyclic data
Diagnostics using data record invocations
Communication:
For MSS with communication function see from page 13/145.
For accessories, see page 13/147.
Application
The 3RK3 modular safety system can be used for all safety-oriented requirements in the manufacturing industry and offers the
following safety functions:
EMERGENCY-STOP
Protective door monitoring
Non-contact protective devices (BWS)
Switching mats
Two-hand operator controls
Approval switches
Operating mode selector switches
Cycle control
Optional interface modules send the diagnostics data to higherlevel bus systems (e. g. PROFIBUS DP). These data are then
available for further processing in the automation system.
13/144


Modules
Version
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
Screw terminals
Order No.
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Central modules
3RK3 Basic
Central module with safety-orientated inputs and
outputs
8 inputs
1 two-channel relay output
1 two-channel solid-state output
Max. 7 expansion modules can be connected,
including 3RK3 931-0AA00 memory module
3RK3 111-1AA10
1 unit
0.300
3RK3 211-1AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 221-1AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 231-1AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 311-1AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 511-1BA10
1 unit
0.300
3RK3 111-1AA10
Expansion modules
4/8 F-DI
Safety-orientated expansion module
8 inputs
3RK3 211-1AA10
2/4 F-DI 1/2 F-RO
Safety-orientated mixed expansion module
4 inputs
2 single-channel relay outputs
3RK3 221-1AA10
2/4 F-DI 2F-DO
4 inputs
2 two-channel solid-state outputs
3RK3 231-1AA10
8 DO
Standard output module
8 solid-state outputs
3RK3 311-1AA10
Interface modules
DP interface
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485
3RK3 511-1BA10
To connect the central module to expansion modules or interface modules you need the 3UF7 930-0AA00-0 connection cable. See page 13/147.

13/145

Modules
Version
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
Spring-type
terminals
Order No.
Weight
per PU
approx.
List
Price $
per PU
kg
Central modules
3RK3 Basic
Central module with safety-orientated inputs and
outputs
8 inputs
1 two-channel relay output
1 two-channel solid-state output
Max. 7 expansion modules can be connected,
including 3RK3 931-0AA00 memory module
3RK3 111-2AA10
1 unit
0.300
3RK3 211-2AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 221-2AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 231-2AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 311-2AA10
1 unit
0.150
3RK3 511-2BA10
1 unit
0.300
3RK3 111-2AA10
Expansion modules
4/8 F-DI
Safety-orientated expansion module
8 inputs
3RK3 211-2AA10
2/4 F-DI 1/2 F-RO
4 inputs
2 single-channel relay outputs
3RK3 221-2AA10
2/4 F-DI 2F-DO
4 inputs
2 two-channel solid-state outputs
3RK3 231-2AA10
8 DO
Standard output module
8 solid-state outputs
3RK3 311-2AA10
Interface modules
DP interface
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485
3RK3 511-2BA10
To connect the central module to expansion modules or interface modules you need the 3UF7 930-0AA00-0 connection cable. See page 13/147.
13/146


Accessories
Version
Order No.
List
Price $
per PU
PU
PS*
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Connection cables (essential accessory)

Connection cables
For connecting the central module, expansion
modules and the interface module
Length 0.025 m (flat)
3UF7 930-0AA00-0
1 unit
0.010
PC cables for PC/PG communication with

3RK3 modular safety system
Through the system interface, for connecting to
the serial interface of the PC/PG
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
1 unit
0.150
USB/serial adapters
To connect an RS 232 PC cable
to the USB port of a PC,
recommendend for use with
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7, modular safety system
3RK3, soft starter 3RW44,
ET 200S/ECOFAST/ET 200pro motor starter,
AS-i safety monitor, AS-i analyzer
3UF7 946-0AA00-0
1 unit
0.150
For system interface
3UF7 950-0AA00-0
5 units
0.100
For parameterizing the 3RK3 modular safety

system without a PC/PG
Through the system interface
3RK3 931-0AA00
1 unit
0.100
For external connection of the system

interface
Outside, for example, a control cabinet
3UF7 920-0AA00-0
1 unit
0.030
3RP19 03
10 units
0.002
3UF7 932-0AA00-0
PC cables and adapters
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
Interface covers
3UF7 950-0AA00-0
Memory modules
3RK3 931-0AA00
Door adapters
3UF7 920-0AA00-0
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing
E. g. on mounting plate, 2 units required per
device
Can be used for 3RK3
3RP19 03
ES 2007 standard modular safety system

Parameterization, start-up and diagnostics software
for the 3RK3 modular safety system
Runs on WIN 2000/Win XP PROF/Win VISTA:
Business32, Ultimate32
Without PC cable
Floating license for one user
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
3 languages (German/English/French),
communication through the system interface
3ZS1 314-5CC10
-0YA5
License key on USB stick, Class A
3ZS1 314-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
0.230
License key download, Class A
3ZS1 314-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
0.230
Software Update Service

For 1 year with automatic extension,
assuming the current software version is in use,
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
communication through the system interface
3ZS1 314-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
0.230
PC cables
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
1 unit
0.150
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

13/147

Modules
General data
Device data
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
g/ms
15/11
Touch protection acc. to EN 61140 or EN 60529
IP20
Permissible mounting position
Vertical mounting surface (+10/-10), deviating mounting positions

are permitted for reduced ambient temperature
Minimum distances
For heat dissipation through convection from the devices

25 mm to the ventilation openings (top and bottom)

During operation
Storage and transport
C
C
-20 ... +60

-40 ... +85
Installation height above sea level
2000
SIL integrity level SIL CL acc. to IEC 61508
Safety category CAT acc. to EN 954-1
Type acc. to EN 574
III C
20 years
Environmental data
IEC 60947-5-1
EMC interference immunity

Vibrations
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 ... 500
0.75
EN 60068-2-78
Central module
Device data
Number of sensor inputs (1-channel)
Number of test outputs
Number of outputs
1 relay output, two-channel

1 solid-state output, two-channel
Dimensions H x W x D
mm
111 x 45 x 124 screw terminals; 113 x 45 x 124 spring-type terminals
Weight
300
24 DC
Device current supply through a power supply unit
acc. to IEC 60 536 safety class (SELV or PELV)
acc. to IEC 61131-2
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Operating range
300
Rated impulse voltage Uimp
kV
Total current input
mA
185
Rated power at Us
4.5
Utilization category acc. to EN 60947-5-1 (relay outputs)

AC15 at 230 V
DC13 at 24 V (semiconductor outputs)
DC13 at 24 V
A
A
A
2
1
1.5
10 x 106 operating cycles (relays)
Mechanical endurance during normal duty

Switching frequency z at rated operational current
1/h
1000
2/1.5

Fuse links LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG operational class
Operational class quick
A
A
4
6
1 /h
1 /h
5.14 x 10-9
1.28 x 10-5
Per hour (PFHd)
On demand (PFD)
Parameters for cables
100

1000
Conductor capacity
nF
330
Line resistance
13/148


Modules
Expansion modules
Device data
2/4F-DI 2F-DO
4/8F-DI
2/4F-DI 1/2F-RO
Number of sensor inputs (1-channel)
Number of test outputs
Number of outputs
2 solid-state outputs,
two-channel
2 relay outputs, single

channel
mm
111 x 22.5 x 124 screw terminals;

113 x 22.5 x 124 spring-type terminals
Weight
160
24 DC 15 %
Rated control supply voltage Us acc. to IEC 61131-2
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Operating range
50
500
Total current input
mA
85
60
85
Rated power at Us
2.5
Utilization category acc. to EN 60947-5-1

DC13 at 24 V
AC15 at 230 V
1/h
1000
1000
1/h
1/h
2.7 x 10-9
8.34 x 10-6
1.89 x 10-9
4.29 x 10-6
3.79 x 10-9
5.85 x 10-6
Per hour (PFHd)
On demand (PFD)
Parameters for cables

Line resistance
100

1000
Conductor capacity
nF
330
8DO expansion modules

Device data
8
Number of outputs
mm
111 x 22.5 x 124 screw terminals;

113 x 22.5 x 124 spring-type terminals
Weight
160
24 DC 15 %
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Operating range
50
500
Total current input
mA
60
Rated power at Us
1.5
Utilization category acc. to EN 60947-5-1 (relay outputs)

DC13 at 24 V
0.5
1/h
1000
Interface module
Device data
32-bit cyclic data can be exchanged by PLC (DPV0);
acyclic communication through DPV1
Communication
mm
111 x 45 x 124 screw terminals; 113 x 45 x 124 spring-type terminals
Weight
270
24 DC 15 %
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Operating range
50
500

13/149

Modules
Central module with screw terminals
Central module with spring-type terminals
102
88
110
113
118,5
138,5
102
80
106
111
118,5
138,5
1)
1)
NSA0_00473
37
45
115
119
115
119
Expansion module with screw terminals
Expansion module with spring-type terminals
75
94
105
110,5
1)
1)
115
119
Interface module with screw terminals
115
119
Interface module with spring-type terminals
88
110
113
118,5
138,5
102
80
106
111
119,5
139,5
15
22,5
1)
102
NSA0_00471
15
22,5
73,5
7,2
73,5
68
88
101,5
110,5
7,2
NSA0_00472
37
45
NSA0_00474
1)
NSA0_00469
37
45
1)
115
119
NSA0_00470
37
45
115
119
13/150


3 Se Catalogo

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

3 Se Catalogo

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Switches and Mechanical Safety

3SE International (IEC) Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 plastic enclosures, 31mm and 50 mm widths

selection and ordering data, 31 mm and 50 mm widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/17

3SE2 plastic enclosures, 40 mm width

selection and ordering data, 40 mm and 56 mm widths . . . .13/3813/40

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/42

3SE3 metal enclosures, compact design with molded cable

3SE3, Molded Cable

Switches and Mechanical Safety

3SE Mechanical Safety

3SE5 / 3SE2 interlock switches with separate actuator

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/86

3SE5 / 3SE2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/89

selection and ordering data, metal enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/101

3SE5 / 3SE2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/100

3SB38 two-hand control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/110

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/116

Siemens Industry, Inc.

Switches and Mechanical Safety

3SE / 3TK28 / 3RK3

3TK Mechanical Safety

3TK28, with electronic enabling circuits

3TK28, with special functions

Siemens Industry, Inc.

3SE International Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

The 3SE5 switches are available in five different enclosure sizes:

Popular versions of the position switches in standard enclosures

The following items are available in addition from the 3SE2

Position switches with plastic and metal enclosures

Various basic switches can be selected for the 3SE5 series:

Examples of selection options in the modular system

Twist actuators for twist levers and rod actuators,

Siemens Industry, Inc.

3SE International Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

Optional LED indicators

LED indicators available for all enclosure sizes

Easy plug-in method for fast replacement of the actuator head

The enclosure versions can be supplied with an LED signaling

(1) Open cover

Fast connection method

For plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm

The new three-pole switching block (2 NC, 1 NO) in snap-action

These position switches can be wired quickly and easily as an

Siemens Industry, Inc.

3SE International Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

The 3SE5 position switches differ from the previous series

Siemens Industry, Inc.

3SE International Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

Version with M12 connector socket or 6-pole + PE

Complete units Enclosure width 31 mm

Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm

Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm

With teflon plunger

With teflon plunger

Angular roller levers

Siemens Industry, Inc.

3SE International Limit Switches

3SE5 / 3SE2 / 3SE3

3SE5 1.., 3SE5 2..